Home

2013 Fiat 500 Owner`s Manual

1. EZ Entry Feature i ce em s 101 Memory Feature eese negur ge paktiga 102 Heated Seats If Equipped 102 Head Restraints 0 000s eee 103 ll TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 106 B LIGHTS iho ive RERUMS Feta die 107 Multifunction Lever 000 107 Headlights 24 44 0226 e ERI eR ERE S 108 High Beams ues be a e Re rus 108 Hash To Pass oooooooooooo oo 108 Parking Lights 0000 109 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 109 TUTE SION ALS 1 esegue pie des 109 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x Lane Change ASSiSt oooooooooo o 110 Follow Me Home Headlight Delay 110 Interior Lights ice RR ERR doe 110 Front Fog Lights If Equipped 112 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS 112 Front Windshield Wiper Operation 113 Rear Windshield Wiper 115 E TILT STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED 116 E ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL 117 To AcHyalte c cde rese ta 118 To Set A Desired Speed 04 118 TO Deactivate os o isa RUE arte d us 118 To Resume Speed midis 119 A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 To Vary The Speed Setting 119 Emergency Operation
2. STARTING AND OPERATING In E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 280 M ADDING FUEL 00040 283 MMT In Gasoline oo o o ooococooo ooo 281 Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 283 Materials Added To Fuel 282 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 285 Fuel System Cautions 0 282 W TRAILER TOWING 00040 285 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 283 M RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC 286 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle 286 A STARTING AND OPERATING 217 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON RUN position A child could operate power windows other con trols or move the vehicle Manual Transmission If Equipped Apply the parking brake place the shift lever in NEU TRAL and pr
3. 78 Diagnostic System Onboard 329 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission 357 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 351 Door Locks 2 tine acia ees 19 Door Locks Automatic 2 0 ooo ooo eae 21 en INDEX 399 Downshifting esei eae bce ees ket 222 Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water ssi esce ies 234 Electrical Power Outlets o o 128 Electric Remote Mirrors sls 88 Electronic Brake Control SysteM 243 Brake Assist System 000000005 244 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 117 Electronic Stability Control ESC 246 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 152 Emergency In Case of Hazard Warning Flasher llus 291 Jacking sx ek eR be sande 302 Jump Starting 0 cece eee eee 313 TOWING ax x eee ocn e se dote ER Hb et a 320 Emission Control System Maintenance Engine Adr Cleanet ovis oU E Sue dba e be enr us 336 Break In Recommendations 75 Checking Oil Level cua ewe es 332 Compartment ues v y Ra ERR E 327 Cooling ace ck rapere a bt ERR gea 348 Exhaust Gas Caution ooooooooooooo oo 76 Fails to Start 22 242 RE RAEE SESS 219 Flooded Starting o oooooooooooo eee 219 Fuel Requirements 0 00000005 279 Qil cies eon od hanced M 332 Oil Filler Cap 2206300283 a sS ri
4. Child Restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Weight of the LATCH Seat Belt Only LATCH Seat Belt Top Child Child Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor Restraint Only Top Tether Anchor Rear Facing Up to 65 Ibs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Rear Facing More than X Child Restraint 65 lbs 29 5 kg Forward Facing Up to 65 lbs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Forward Facing More than X Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH Restraint System Anchor Tether We LATCH The next generation of child safety V 022668173 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH equipped child seats There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position These anchorages are used to install LATCH equipped child seats without using the vehicle s seat belts Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages In these seating positions the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint Please see the following table for more information 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM
5. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll ENGINE COMPARTMENT 1 4L 327 ll ENGINE COMPARTMENT 1 4L TURBO 328 ll ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II 329 ll EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS 329 E REPLACEMENT PARIS 200 331 WM STUDIO SERVICE 00000 331 ll MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 332 Engine OH niece dese ERE REI DEG 332 Engine OIL Filters aes edis 336 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 336 Maintenance Free Battery 337 Air Conditioner Maintenance 338 Body Lubrication lt seses irse rades Wiper Blades oooooooooooooomoo Adding Washer Fluid Exhaust System llle Cooling System 0 0 00000000 348 O Brake System s Ea ed aas 353 Manual Transmission If Equipped 356 326 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Automatic Transmission If Equipped 356 Front Turn Signal Parking And Appearance Care And Protection Daytime Running Lamps 373 From Corrosion ees 358 Front Fog LaMpS oooooooooooo ooo 373 Convertible Top Care If Equipped 364 Front Rear Side Marker Lamps 373 MUSES eene ink peat ing tasks 366 Rear Tail Stop Backup
6. 356 Lubricant Selection llle 356 Master Cylinder Brakes o ooo o o o 353 404 INDEX IN Mirtos ux as qe X X RR cr nc Kem E Ros baw eS e 87 Automatic Dimming esses 87 Electric Powered llle 88 Heated aciendo al dose OR ORO aos Seed 90 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 8 Monitor Tire Pressure System sss 273 Multi Function Control Lever 108 New Vehicle Break In Period 75 Occupant Restraints o oo o oo ooo tirisan 43 Occupant Restraints Sedan o o o o o o 24 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 279 Odometer l l 151 Tip essa end Ree TIE DET rn ges 151 Oil Change Indicator llle 156 Oil Change Indicator Reset 156 Oil Engitieu sick ace erede Uca dox een ee 332 Capacity disney aware duis kae Wd Ras dis 376 Change Interval 44 92 x Re sas aw 333 Checking dreads lios ped EUR danda 332 Disposal voor per RU ER ER E s 335 ign 2 ina M 336 Filter Disposal iio vw Reo 335 Identification Logo ooooooommmoo oo 334 Materials Added to oo o ooo ooo o 335 Recommendation 00000 334 SA te ud e ae PORE IDE e UA 335 b Ar 334 Oil Filter Selection llle 336 Onboard Diagnostic System 000 200 329 Operating Precautions less 329 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 5
7. 249 E TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION 250 Tire Markings 250 Tire Identification Number TIN 254 Tire Terminology And Definitions 255 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 256 A STARTING AND OPERATING 215 E TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION 261 Lite OF Tir dace RR ex e xs 269 Tire Pressure 6 0 eee eee 261 Replacement Tires 2 2 6 0 enntre iea 269 Tite Inflation Pressures css cna iasa 262 MI TIRE CHAINS cs cari enr oc OC 271 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 264 BM TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS 272 Radial Ply Ties 44 42214 0 4 is efe eb hn 264 Wi TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING All Season Tires If Equipped 264 PESCENIUTUNIS queas qiisetaua d aise tes Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped 265 Bee oo NONO UU Uca eae qur Enhanced System If Equipped Snow Tires eiii d ea a e 265 Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire General Information 0 278 And Wheel If Equipped 266 M FUEL REQUIREMENTS 5 ms 279 Compact Spare Tite sucinta ere s 266 Wi FUEL REQUIREMENTS 1 4L Turbo 279 Tire Spinning scs esee Rs oss RR RO RR RN 267 Reformulated Gasoline 280 Tread Wear Indicators 268 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 280 216
8. o o 27 Side Airbag cr 2s essa dor ba a nan 46 Signals TUNN ieu aces DERA bee a ee 80 Snow Chains Tire Chains o o ooo 271 Snow Tires 24045 raid eve X STE EG 265 Spare Te ic ca crees eee ee Ewe EOS x 266 Spark PIugs uva Hed sed E a EE Hes 377 Speed Control Cruise Control 117 Speedometer d pu he als e rectae i Ros 152 a INDEX 407 Sport Mode 0 44440 stow Reni x RE eh es 240 sjrigs PEE 217 Automatic Transmission sss 217 Cold Weather seb ee rem e we ee 218 Engine Fails to Start o oooooooomooo 219 Manual Transmission 0 217 Steering PONE iare iegdeieic arg a deo a qt da d 237 Tilt Column ssec ere ek 116 Wheel Tt esee ERR eee bea eas 116 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 198 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 198 Storage cae a WG hie c wore he Bae Oa 370 storage Vehicle s ici ar pee RS 211 Storing Your Vehicle s ss sssri nud brbgan oo 370 Stuck Pre cista exem ta daa 317 Studio SERVICE veces ted a ROG S tert 331 SUN ROOF cedes ek e ESOS hae ER PE ae 125 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 37 Synthetic Engine Oil bre ees 335 Tachometer llle 152 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 203 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 150 Tilt Steering Column iilii 116 Tire and Loading Information Placard 256 TREFT essensa e Be
9. o o 342 Windshield Wipers llle 112 Wiper Blade Replacement 0 342 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems Chrysler Group LLC Ii 13FF500 126 AC 3
10. 389 Prepare For The Appointment 386 in The 50 United States And Prepare A List c cbxosd aed Crea 386 Washington D C oooooccommmmmm ros 389 Be Reasonable With Requests 386 In Canada 390 B IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE 386 M PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS 390 FIAT Customer Center sse sss 387 M DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES 391 O Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY 387 Tre adWeat xev anpra p Re dn e RC Ra 392 Service Contract ccc ccc ccc ccc een 388 Traction Grades eso cocoes c eera aeaea a e eee 392 Temperature Grades o o oooo oo oo 393 386 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you are having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder AII work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must
11. lees 279 Gage ss nodbabes hee ahs PR dC RUTAS a 152 Light e RR Re 142 Materials Added less 282 Octane Rating sess cm eee c ey eos 279 a INDEX 401 Requirements iacere wm e a 279 Tank Capacity 4 any derat bare tad KR E deu ca 376 Fueling iie cre RR ERR RES REIP dent 283 lg 366 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 283 Gasoline Clean Alt o oooooo oo o 280 Gasoline Fuel o oo ooooooooomo oo 279 Gasoline Reformulated 280 Gauges Coolant Temperature 0 000 150 Fuel uen ses ec eda PRES BERG E Pas 152 Odometer ssd waa aed eade da ERE 151 Tachometer leen 152 Gear Ranges sc wies do dues eR heh gr 226 Gear Select Lever Override ls 319 General Information llle 15 General Maintenance l l ess 332 Glass Cleaning ccce raa be ear i fenke 362 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water veo scr RS satisi tet 234 Headlights o eee aden eat e RUE eee 108 Cleaning retat aaa as eae ta wae Pea HE aod 362 FISH Beam eter Ae eee uc Ee deus 142 Passing uu eed ead Phage gne eda 108 OW uses acea wx d bebe e ded fea ea a 108 Heated Mirrors lese lll RR Ree 90 Heated Seats ee ee 102 Heater dh ERR ou ew Een e Rae Ta 201 Hill Start Assist llle eee 245 Holder C p ie Cede e eR moe ds 131 Hood Release llle a 106 Igriti nz os id
12. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Your vehicle has Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC or Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB and when deployment occurs the SABIC and SAB air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 5 If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided in If You Need Consumer Assistance WARNING e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the
13. ON OFF button is pressed briefly When the car radio is turned on and the on volume limit is on the volume is limited to a setting of five even if it had been set higher when previously used Turning The Car Radio Off Press and hold approximately 2 seconds the ON OFF button to turn the radio off 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Selecting The Radio Functions By pressing the TUNER button briefly and repeatedly the following audio sources can be selected cyclically AM FM and Satellite Bands if equipped Selecting The CD Function By briefly pressing the MEDIA button the CD audio source can be selected only if a CD is loaded Volume Adjustment To adjust the volume press the buttons Vol or Vol to increase decrease the volume Mute Pause Function Press the amp button briefly to activate the MUTE func tion The volume will gradually decrease and the word ing TUNER Mute will be shown on the display in radio mode or CD Pause in CD mode Press the amp button again to deactivate the MUTE func tion The volume will gradually increase until it reaches the previously set level When the volume level is changed using the dedicated controls the Mute function is deactivated and the vol ume is adjusted to the new level selected Audio Adjustment The functions that can be selected from the audio menu change depending on the context AM FM MEDIA SATELLITE Press the AUDIO b
14. Center Seat LATCH WARNING This vehicle does not have a center seating position Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to install a child seat in the center of the back seat Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu facturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here To Install A LATCH compatible Child Restraint 1 If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto matic Locking Retractor ALR seat belt stow the seat belt following the instructions below See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt to check what type of seat belt each seating position has 2 Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages 3 Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 4 Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat ing position If the child restraint has a tether strap connect it to the top tether anchorage See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for direc tions to attach a tether anchor
15. Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load LL Light load tire C D E E G Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 254 STARTING AND OPERATING Ha Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire however the date code may only be on one side Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the date code located on the
16. This function may be used to adjust the volume of the beep accompanying the buttons SET ESC UP Aor DOWN V buttons can be adjusted according to 8 levels To adjust the volume proceed as follows 1 Briefly press the SET ESC button The previously set volume level will flash on the display 2 Press the UP Aor DOWN V button for setting 3 Briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the menu screen or press and hold the SET ESC button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings Belt Buzzer Buzzer Activation For S B R Indication This function will only be displayed after a FIAT Group Automobiles studio has deactivated the S B R system Daytime Running Lamps DRL This function may be used to activate deactivate the Daytime Running Lamps Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off 1 Briefly press the SET ESC button to display the three sub menus 2 Briefly press the SET ESC button On or Off will flash on the display according to previous setting 3 Press the UP Aor DOWN V button for setting 4 Briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the menu screen or press and hold the button approxi mately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings GSI Gear Shift Indicator This function may be used to set the Gear Shift Indicator in two submenus Fuel Econ On and Fuel Econ Off Fuel Econ On turns o
17. Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child safety seat Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old Children should remain rearward facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat WARNING e Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an air bag A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rearward facing infant seat Only use a rearward facing child restraint in a rear seat Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward facing in the vehicle For
18. LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle 022669374 e Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position e it Top Tether Anchorage Symbol a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child restraint for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the com bined weight is more than 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint No Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages N A 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In removed Can two child restraints be No Never share a LATCH anchorage attached using a common lower with two or more child restraints LATCH anchorage If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchor ages use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position
19. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufac turer s instructions Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child s reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of buckling it behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it Do not lock the seatbelt Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE HN WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re straint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing a
20. 3 Pressure Gauge 204 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN 4 5 6 7 8 Power Button Mode Select Knob Sealant Hose Clear Air Pump Hose Black Power Plug TIREFIT Usage Precautions e Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 prior to the expiration date printed on the bottle label to assure optimum operation of the sys tem Refer to Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT section F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement The Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 are a one tire application use After each use always replace these components immediately at an authorized studio When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form clean water and a damp cloth will remove the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel components Once the sealant dries it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded For optimum performance make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the TIREFIT kit You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle tires The kit also comes with two needles located in the Accessory Storage Compartment on the bottom of the air pump for inflating sport balls rafts or similar inflatable items However use only the Air Pump Hose 7 and make sure the Mode Select Knob 5 is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them The TIREFIT Sealant is only in tended to seal punctures less than Y in 6 mm diameter in the tre
21. Can the rear facing child restraint Yes The child seat may touch the back touch the back of the front of the front passenger seat if the passenger seat child restraint manufacturer also allows contact See your child restraint owner s manual for more information Can the head restraints be Yes all ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 Locating The LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback below the anchorage sym bols on the seatback They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along gap between the seatback and seat cushion LATCH Anchorages Locating The LATCH Anchorages In addition there are tether strap anchorages Y behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE HI LATCH compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage Forward facing child restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage
22. VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drink ing don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of fea tures and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obliga tion upon itself to install them on products previously manu factured FIAT is a registered trademark of FIAT Group Marketing amp Corporate Communication SpA used under license by Chrysler
23. on the display 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL IE 2 Press the UP Aor DOWN V button for setting 3 Briefly press the SET ESC button and month will flash on the display 4 Press the UP A or DOWN V button for setting 5 Briefly press the SET ESC button and day will flash on the display 6 Press the UP Aor DOWN V button for setting NOTE The setting will increase or decrease by one unit each time the UP ZXor DOWN V button is pressed Press and hold the UP Aor DOWN button to increase decrease the setting rapidly Save the setting by briefly pressing the button when you approach the required setting Briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the menu screen or press and hold the SET ESC button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings See Radio Repeat Audio Information With this function active the EVIC display shows infor mation relevant to the sound system e Radio tuned radio station frequency automatic tuning activation or AutoSTore e CD audio CD MP3 track number To activate On or to deactivate Off the sound system info displaying proceed as follows 1 Briefly press the SET ESC button On or Off will flash on the display according to the previous setting 2 Press the UP Aor DOWN V button for setting 3 Briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the menu screen or press and hold the SET ESC button approximately
24. Forces gener at the bottom edge of the cover ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position you can use the J ba following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever Shift Lever Override Access Cover 1 Turn the engine OFF 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 2 Firmly apply the parking brake 320 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN 5 Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool into the access 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL hole and push and hold the override release lever in 6 Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE 8 Reinstall the shift lever override access cover This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service Towing Wheels OFF AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION MANUAL TRANSMISSION Condition The Ground Flat Tow NONE If transmission is operable If transmission is operable Wheel Lift Rear Transmission in NEUTRAL Transmission in NEUTRAL e 30 mph 48 km h max speed 65 mph 10
25. If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized studio for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed e If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration me For states that require an Inspection and Mainte nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction 330 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready f
26. Overheating Engine oooooooooooooo o 150 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 5 Paint Care eee ene rade eva 358 Parking Brake comisaria dass gp a hae a 238 A INDEX 405 Passing Light as Pee m e hee 108 A LC 74 Placard Tire and Loading Information 257 Power Door LOCKS irc ee ea Y 20 Mirtos rt ss atk at an PAR ER E Be wee ns 88 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 128 DOCS ases esa aida x 237 SUNTOOD ace er da aO ah NA 125 Windows eee 21 Power Steering Fluid llle 378 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 37 Preparation for Jacking o ooooooooo 306 Pretensioners Seat Belts iss Reo dead aa ox wate obs 35 Radial Ply Tires iu etd uta eto weve nece 264 Radio Operation eae wal dio iw ex een be s 171 Radio Reception i se dpa hae deba 171 Radio Sound Systems oooooooo o o 171 Rear Liftgate Sedan isses 23 Rear Window Features o o ooooooo ooo 134 Recorder Event Data o o o 53 Recreational Towing o ooooooooooo o 286 Reformulated Gasoline oo oooooo oo oo 280 Refrigtr t vn ooo ias ada da eO E Yn 339 Release Hood o ooo 106 Reminder Seat Belt cocos cr ew ae 35 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 198 Replacement Bulbs aese asied as ia eh o 371 Replacement Keys 0 0 00 0c eee iisti 14 Replacement Parts norcross cneasa ras oo oo 331 Repla
27. Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 238 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE Even if the power steering assistance is no longer operational it is still possible to steer the vehicle Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort especially at low speeds and during parking maneuvers e If the condition persists see your authorized studio for service PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied Also be certain to leave manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear The parking brake lever is located in the center console To apply the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible To release the parking brake pull the lever up slightly press the center button then lower the lever completely Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the MAR ACC ON RUN position the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade The parking brake A STARTING AND OPERATING 239 should always be applied whenever the driver is not in WARNING Continued the vehicle e Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged WARNING before driving failure to do so can lead to
28. Time and Mode 2 Press the UP A or DOWN V button to navigate the two sub menu items 3 Select the required option and then press the SET ESC button UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163 4 When accessing the Time sub menu item briefly e When accessing the Mode submenu briefly press press the SET ESC button and hours will flash on the SET ESC button The previously set display format the display will flash on the display 5 Press the UP A or DOWN V button for setting e Press the UP ZA or DOWN V button to select 24h or 12h 6 Briefly press the SET ESC button and minutes will flash on the display When you have selected the required settings briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the Time Mode 7 Press the UP A or DOWN V button for setting sub menu screen or press and hold the SET ESC button NOTE approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings The setting will increase or decrease by one unit each time the UP A or DOWN V button is pressed Press Set Date and hold the button to increase decrease the setting rapidly Save the setting by briefly pressing the button when you approach the required setting This function may be used to set the date day month year To ch follows e Briefly press the SET ESC button to return to the Oee We MOIS PIPERS o Alps Time sub function 1 Briefly press the SET ESC button and year will flash
29. can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Ina collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passen gers are also properly secured Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result To Open Press and hold the power sunroof switch rearward for approximately one second and the sunroof will stop at the vented position Press the switch a second time and hold for approximately one second and release the sunroof will open fully then stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof To Close With the sunroof in the full open position pull the power sunroof button and hold it for approximately one second the sunroof will return to the vented position Pull the switch a second time and hold for approximately one second to completely close the sunroof a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windo
30. cocos ers td 356 Gear Ranges costes da eae Xs edad 226 Special Additives ia e m Ren 357 Autos ck e como bee mr e mn 232 a INDEX 397 Battery eie en boa aa E wie aes 337 Jump Starting aaa oie een RE Rude 313 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 17 Belts Seat o o ooooooooooo ooo ooo 77 Body Mechanism Lubricati0N 342 B Pillar Locati0N ooo ooooo 256 Brake Assist System oo o ooooo ooo o 244 Brake Fluid gt cre soc e mae dee 378 Brake Parking see A ees 238 Brakes i d eio ex PRG ORG ER ks 353 BrakeSystem llle 242 Anti Lock ABS 2 2 0 0 eee ee ee 242 Master Cylinder 0 0 00 cece eee 353 Parking ci cee eee ya ee as 238 Warning Light i sseecie e bp anaes 148 Brake Transmission Interlock 225 Bulb Replacement sa nesset eeu nroa tennan 371 Bulbs Light occ oa oe OES GO eS EA 80 Capacities Antifreeze Engine Coolant 376 Capacities Eluid iege e b nta 376 Caps Filler O indes ae 283 Oil Engine sede ies a PRESS 334 Carbon Monoxide Warning ooooooooooo 76 Cargo Area Features 2 ss opis e EE RE EA 133 Car Washes ci isses e o es 359 CD Compact Disc Player oooooo oo 171 Cellular Phone i i sies a tunis 200 Chains Tite 44522452524 aaa ened Rae ee E EUR RR 271 Changing A Flat Tire ooooooooooooo oo 302 Chart Tire Sizing curar aa ea 252 Check Engine Light Mal
31. i cid b Rec exec 54 Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions 33 Transporting Pets etsiten emitan resi eee 74 Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR E ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS 75 If Equipped eux ce x boe e eh eas 33 Ba SAFETY TIPS i n ok Re Rec CER 75 Energy Management Feature 34 Transporting Passengers ss e ettiri s di Pes 75 Seat Belt Pretensioners 00 35 Exhaust Gas sisse pm a ga oes 76 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System bd DeltAlestB s gine eet ira whee eo 35 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside Seat Belt Extender o o oooooo o o 36 ESO E m Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make TORTE 7 O A d Outside The Vehicle 79 Supplemental Restraint System SRS Aur Bags ces eed RR o a a 37 a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The vehicle is supplied with a code card containing key code numbers to order duplicate keys and the autho rized studio that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys The key fob contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter with an integrated key To use the mechanical key simply press the mechanical key release button Ignition Key Removal 1 Place the shift lever in PARK if equipped with an automatic transmission 2 Rotate the key to the OFF LOCK position i 3 Rem
32. o o o o eo o og e 2 e 2 2 l whichever comes first e 82 8 8 8 8 8 8 S S S S S S N a eo v o c g RI9 5 9 rs 9 z d Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 v gssz2g882282222P J F S F 8 3 8 5 9 si 8 RS B Clean and lube sun roof tracks X X X X X X X S Replace spark plugs X X X X Cc Flush and replace the engine coolant at E 10 years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km X X D whichever comes first U Inspect and replace PCV valve if X L necessary S Replace the timing belt X 8 The spark plug change interval is mileage based only yearly intervals do not apply 384 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES INN WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic e Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve hicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A l N T E N A N ie E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS ll SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE B WARRANTY INFORMATION 389 FOR YOUR VEHICLE 386 E REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
33. ss eee hee oes 217 Ie a os tase rete Cold Weather Operation es 218 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System If Engine Fails To Start esee 219 Six Speed Automatic Transmission 225 After Starting cie 219 bu E 226 E MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED 220 B AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED 4x 232 O Five Speed Manual Transmission 220 E s Recommended Shift Speeds 222 214 STARTING AND OPERATING HN 233 Bi ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM 243 ll DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acc leration is ek eh tem action reirnos dados de E DRIVING THROUGH WATER Flowing Rising Water o oo o ooooo Shallow Standing Water E POWER STEERING 22322 9 ey d B PARKING BRAKE cu tbkRe I n PR E B SPORT MODE esas pied oe Vaca dace xs Manual Transmission If Equipped Automatic Transmission If Equipped B BRAKE SYSTEM a gsaek 04 Ead a Oe RT Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System ABS 242 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 244 Brake Assist System BAS 244 Traction Control System TCS 245 Hill Start Assist HSA 0 245 Electronic Stability Control ESC 246 ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light
34. the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo rary emergency use only Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter T or S molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex ample T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 252 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards Tor S Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent 76 Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in A STARTING AND OPERATING 253 EXAMPLE
35. the transmission will only shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever rearward or forward except as described below e The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to prevent engine lugging and will display the current gear The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop After a stop the driver should manually upshift the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated e Starting out in second or third gear can be helpful in snow or icy conditions To select second or third gear after the vehicle is brought to a stop tap the shift lever rearward once or twice A STARTING AND OPERATING 233 e The transmission will automatically upshift when nec e To disengage AutoStick mode return the shift lever essary to prevent engine over speed to the DRIVE position You can shift in or out of the AutoStick position at any time without taking your The system will ignore shift commands that would foot off the accelerator pedal cause engine lugging or overspeed An audible beep will sound if an inappropriate gear is requested WARNING Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged because the transmission will not shift automatically Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a o u slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their e Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when grip and the vehicle could skid causing a coll
36. the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions 348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Cooling System WARNING When working near the radiator cooling fan disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine
37. through the skin It causes skin eye and respira tory irritation Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin Change clothing as soon as possible if there is any contact with clothing TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex In case of an allergic reaction or rash consult a physician immediately Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children If swallowed rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water Do not induce vomiting Consult a physician immediately Hazard Warning flashers Verify that the valve stem on the wheel with the deflated tire is in a position that is near to the ground This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses 6 and 7 to reach the valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground This will provide the best positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air pump Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding Place the transmission in PARK auto transmission or in Gear manual transmission and turn Off the ignition 4 Set the parking brake a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 297 B Setting Up To Use TIREFIT 1 Turn the Mode Select Knob 5 to the Sealant Mode position Uncoil the Sealant Hose 6 and then remove the cap from the fitting at the end of the hose Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire Remove
38. under the Child Restraints section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position Driver Passenger First Row N A ALR Second Row ALR ALR e N A Not Applicable ALR Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IN anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder b
39. with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle Disabling Enabling HSA If you wish to turn the HSA system on or off it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESC cor rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteering or understeering condi tion Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel positio
40. Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your headlight beam selection passing light and turn signals vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision NOTE The external lights can only be turned on with Failure to follow this warning could result in serious the ignition in the ON RUN position injury or death CAUTION To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open 8 in 20 cm approximately and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Headlights Rotate the end of the multifunction lever up Z ward to the first detent for headlight operation 031410253 Headlight Operation NOTE When the headlights are turned on the Daytime Running Lights will be deactivated High Beams D With the low beams activated push the multi function lever towards the instrument panel to turn on the high beams Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel to turn off the high beams Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer ing wheel This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on until the lever is released a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Parking Li
41. Group LLC Copyright O 2012 Chrysler Group LLC amp SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 2 10 INTRODUCTION esteis cter suat uirbadsietka drea SUIS Eta Rida Edd 3 HEN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 00 000s cece eee eens 9 I UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE essen 81 EJ UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ien 137 4 STARTING AND OPERATING 0d rial dia 213 mm WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4 ctp sa pe e iaa 289 m MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE sist 325 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 4 6 id tud ce s PR ERES VC een OE man dea dose ids 379 E IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE sesconosterarrisirero sacarse 385 9 INDEX 395 10 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS B INTRODUCTION 000 4 M VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER 7 ll HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 5 B VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS 8 M WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 7 4 INTRODUCTION IN INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle Be as sured that it represents precision workmanship distinc tive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and variou
42. Ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 Ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 A STARTING AND OPERATING 261 WARNING Safety WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION y 3 M i shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure e Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect ve hicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control e Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure Continued 262 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Continued Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy I
43. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF WARNING Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 316 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN Jump Starting Procedure 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery BEENING 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper Failure to follow this procedure could result in per cable to a good engine ground exposed metal part of sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex the discharged vehicle s engine away from the battery plosion and the fuel injection system CAUTION WARNING Failure to follow these procedures could result in Dovnot connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the positive post of the discharged vehicle 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged cable to the positiv
44. Instructions Hands Free Phone SiriusXM Satellite Radio If Equipped 188 If Equipped 1 6 lisse 199 CD PA us e 3 LE EE AE OPE EROR tees 191 CDU O E ciue ve CD MPS Player iate nos epe was ae 193 RADIU OREKA TION SNE MOBE RENES sca Troubleshooting i43 RE s 196 CHUTE CONTROU visitar sea d AN Manual Heating And Air Conditioning 201 Bl iPod USB MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL IF EQUIPPED 0 0 2 cee nne 197 Automatic Temperature Control ATC It Equipped osse mr RR 203 Operating Tips o oo ooooooo oo oo 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 040140268 1 Side Vent 7 Passenger Air Bag 13 Storage Compartment 2 Multifunction Lever Light Control 8 Glove Compartment 14 Shift Lever 3 Instrument Cluster And Warning Lights 9 Rear Defrost Button 15 Sport Button 4 Windshield Wiper Washer Trip Computer 10 Hazard Button 16 Horn Driver Airbag 5 Central Air Vents 11 Climate Controls 6 Storage Compartment Radio 12 Power Windows Control 140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 040364250 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Glow Plug Light If Equipped DO The Glow Plug light will flash during engine oil viscosity sensor measurement in cold weather During this measurement up to 10 seconds the starter will be disabled If the measured oil
45. Press the top open button approximately one second for the partially open position Press the top open button for approximately one second a second time to fully open the convertible top Raising The Power Top From the convertible top fully open position press the top close button for approximately one second for the partially open position Press the top close button for approximately one second a second time to partially close the convertible top Press and hold close button to fully close convertible top a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 NOTE Rail lubrication is recommended every 2000 cycles or if scratching noises due to dust are present Refer to Fluids Lubes and Genuine Part in Maintain ing Your Vehicle for information CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage stains or mildew on the top material Avoid high pressure car washes as they can dam WARNING The convertible top does not provide the structural protection that a reinforced metal roof does and the fabric top cannot be expected to prevent the ejection of the occupants in a collision Therefore it is impor tant that all occupants wear their seat belts at all times Death or serious injuries could occur if you are ejected from the vehicle during a collision age the top material Also increased water pressure may force water past the weather strips Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure
46. Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel s pro tective finish Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of equivalent is recommended protectants on Stain Repel products Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure Pie Care If Equipped Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner Carpena La e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting DDR uU erect ay enor with a clean dry towel MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt 362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile
47. RES button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 6 km h To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push the SET button If the button is continually held in the SET position the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 1 6 km h To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy t
48. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the SET ESC button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled main tenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Trip Computer The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster It features a driver interactive display displays informa tion such as trip information range fuel consumption average speed and travel time Trip Button The TRIP button located on the right steering column stalk can be used to display and to reset the previously described values e A short button press displays the different values Along button press resets the system and then starts a new trip 158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN New Trip To reset Press and hold the TRIP button to reset the system ma
49. able to be transferred to the new radio and will not be active when installed in the customer s vehicle CD Player Introduction This chapter describes the operation of the CD player only To operate the radio refer to the description in the Functions and Adjustments chapter CD Player Selection To activate the CD player built into the equipment proceed as follows Load a CD with the equipment switched on The first track will start to play or e Ifa CD has already been loaded turn on the radio and then briefly press the MEDIA button to select the CD function mode The last track listened to will start to play It is advisable to use original CDs to ensure optimal playing If CD R RWs are used we recommend using good quality media that are burned at the slowest speed possible 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE CD Loading Ejecting To load the CD insert it gently into the slot to activate the motorized loading system which will position it cor rectly The CD can be loaded with the radio off and the ignition key turned to ON RUN In this case the radio will remain off When the radio is turned on the last source listened to before being switched off will be activated When a CD is inserted the display will show the symbol CD and the wording CD Reading They will remain displayed for the whole time required for the radio to read the CD When this time has elapsed the radio automatically
50. affect overall clutch system performance Improper brake fluids may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch function and the ability to shift the transmis sion 356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Manual Transmission If Equipped Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more than 3 16 in 4 7 mm below the bottom of the hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency Of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri cant has become contaminated with water NOTE If contaminated with water the fluid should be changed immediately Automatic Transmission If Equipped Selection Of Lubricant It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life Use only the manufacturer s recommended transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fluid specifications It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recomm
51. air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags e Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air Bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Continued a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 WARNING Continued e Side air bags also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder
52. ant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT en gine coolant antifreeze If a non OAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to ten years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km before replace ment To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same engine Continued coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle 350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology OAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology Mix a minimum solution of 50 OAT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that i
53. approach the required setting Briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the menu screen or press and hold the SET ESC button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings To cancel the setting proceed as follows 1 Briefly press the SET ESC button On will flash on the display 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL IE 2 Press the DOWN Y button Off will flash on the display 3 Briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the menu screen or press and hold the SET ESC button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings Trip B Data Trip B On Through this option it is possible to activate On or deactivate Off the Trip B partial trip display For further information see Trip Computer For activation deactivation proceed as follows 1 Briefly press the SET ESC button On or Off will flash on the display according to previous setting 2 Press the UP Aor DOWN V button to select the setting 3 Briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the menu screen or press and hold the SET ESC button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings Set Time Clock This function may be used to set the clock through two sub menu items Time and Mode Proceed as follows 1 Briefly press the SET ESC button The display will show the two sub menu items
54. below the turn signal controls Tilt Control Lever Push down on the lever to unlock the column With one hand firmly on the steering wheel move the steering column up or down as desired Push the lever up to lock the column firmly in place a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel Electronic Speed Control Buttons NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator
55. both wet and dry conditions and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice Summer tires will not contain the all season designation or mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall Use summer tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow Tires Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter Snow tires can be identified by a mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types 266 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent
56. brake e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with failure and a collision e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav access to an unlocked vehicle e Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or dangerous for a number of reasons A child or injury Also be certain to leave a manual transmis sion in REVERSE or first gear Failure to do so may others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or dren should be warned not to touch the parking injury brake brake pedal or the shift lever e Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition in the MAR ACC ON RUN position A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized studio immediately Continued 240 STARTING AND OPERATING SPORT MODE Manual Transmission If Equipped The Sport mode increases steering feedback to the driver with slight increases in effort and throttle pedal to engine response This driving mode is useful while driving on twisty roads where more steering precision is desired in spirited cornering 1 To activate the Sport mode press the SPORT button SPORT Bu
57. cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy opera tion and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumulations of salt waxes or road film and help reduce streaking and smearing Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield or rear window Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield or rear window Make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the blade Keep the blade rubber out of
58. each of the rear side panels 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE With Bose Premium Audio system if equipped e A subwoofer under the right front seat Two 165 mm diameter midwoofer speakers Anamplifier in the trunk on the right hand side panel e Two 11 mm tweeter speakers in the front pillars e Antenna on the car roof e Two 100 mm full range speakers one speaker in each e Radio with CD MP3 player of the rear side panels aaa UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 Quick Guide Radio Controls BUTTON GENERAL FUNCTIONS MODE O On Short button press Off Long button press TUNER AM FM SAT if equipped source Short repeated button press selection A B C Cycles A B C presets for AM FM SAT Short repeated button press if equipped MEDIA CD AUX Media Player if equipped Short repeated button press and present source selection 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE high tones TREBLE left right balance BALANCE front rear balance FADER BUTTON GENERAL FUNCTIONS MODE A Mute Pause Volume activation deactivation Short button press Button Mute Pause AUDIO Audio adjustments low tones BASS Menu activation short button press Adjustment type selection press A or V Adjustment of values press lt q orp j Information Button Song Artist Album Genre Playlist Folder information if available in CD Media Player and Satellite if so equi
59. for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surround ings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death when they are in close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Rear Park Assist in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using Rear Park Assist Continued a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 WARNING Continued POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof roof switch is located in the overhead console Before using the Rear Park Assist system it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the ve hicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle 034164715 Power Sunroof Switch 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch or with the ignition in the Accessory or Run position for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go Occupants particu larly unattended children
60. harmful to the transmission 222 STARTING AND OPERATING MN Recommended Shift Speeds Downshifting To use your manual transmission for optimal fuel Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and economy it should be upshifted as listed in the following prolong engine life table CAUTION Manual Transmission Recommended Shift Speeds Units In mph km h If you skip more than one gear while downshifting or downshift at too high a vehicle speed you could Pngine a E aM LIE ES damage the engine transmission or clutch Size eration 2 Rate To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life shift 1 4L Accel 14 23 29 38 down to second or first gear when descending a steep 1 4L 23 87 47 61 grade Turbo Cruise 12 18 25 32 When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade Engine 19 29 40 52 downshift early so that the engine will not be overbur dened ee STARTING AND OPERATING 223 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED WARNING CAUTION It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow He engine onde bi O eese das A your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and h
61. have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized studio you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized studio are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized studio We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized studio They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized studio have the a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 387 facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to an authorized studio service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized studio They want to know if you need assistance f an authorized studio is unable to resolve the con cern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Own
62. in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip ment tire and wheel as a spare a non matching tempo rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your vehicle Temporary use spares are engineered to be used only with your vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the following types of non matching tempo rary use spares compact full size or limited use Do not install more than one non matching temporary use spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact full size or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Compact Spare Tire The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity A STARTING AND OPERATING 267 WARNING CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive m
63. is operating or personal injury may result 340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE The A C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet on the lower right of center console Perform the following procedure to replace the filter 1 Remove the T20 Torx screw that secures the passenger side console closeout cover e 072670488 Console Closeout Panel 3 Remove the two 5 5mm screws 1 and 2 that secure the particulate air filter cover to the HVAC housing 072670487 2 Pull the console closeout cover rearward to disengage the front retaining tab and remove the cover MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341 WES 4 Remove the A C air filter by pulling it straight out of the A C Air Filter housing Take note of the air filter position indicators 5 Install the A C air filter with the air filter position indicators pointing in the same direction as removal 072670493 342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN CAUTION The A C air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often 6 Install the passenger side console closeout Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri
64. it indicates the PARK position With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle 230 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris tics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heav
65. main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as How various systems in your vehicle were operating Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have th
66. next screen or to confirm the required menu option Press and hold the SET ESC button approxi mately one second to return to the main screen Press the UP AA button to scroll upward through the displayed menu and the related options or to increase the displayed value Press the DOWN Y button to scroll downward through the displayed menu and the related options or to de crease the value displayed NOTE UP A and DOWN V buttons activate different functions according to the following situations To scroll the menu options upwards or downwards To increase or decrease values during settings ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155 NOTE When opening one of the front doors the EVIC e Set Date display will turn on the clock and the miles or kilometers See Radi covered for versions markets where provided for a Mobi a few seconds e Speed Display Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Autoclose Setup Menu a Units The menu comprises a series of functions arranged ina e Language cycle Press the UP AN and DOWN V buttons to access the different options and settings setup Buzzer Volume Button Volume Daylights D R L Hill Start The setup menu can be activated by pressing the SET ESC button Single presses on the UP A or DOWN V buttons will scroll through the setup menu options The menu includes the following functions e Tire Pressure e Unlock Driver Door First Unlock All Doors e Exit Menu e S
67. notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc tion visit your authorized studio immediately to have 358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN the transmission fluid level checked Operating the ve hicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage CAUTION e If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your au thorized studio immediately Severe transmission damage may occur Your authorized studio has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately Fluid And Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals In addition change the fluid and filter if the transmission is disassembled for any reason Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359 Wh
68. on FMB 5 on FMC 10 on AM band 5 on AMA 5 on AMB 15 on Satellite Band if equipped 5 on SATA 5 on SATB 5 on SATC SPEED VOLUME function Customer selectable auto matic volume adjustment depending on the car speed Automatic Stereo Mono selection CD Section Track selection forward backward Fast forward rewind through tracks CD Display function display of track number and on mp3 discs song title artist and time elapsed since start of the track Playing Audio CD CD R and CD RW WARNING On multimedia CDs besides audio tracks there are data tracks too Playing this type of CD could cause hissing at a volume that could jeopardize road safety as well as causing damage to the final stages and the speakers a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 CD MP3 Section e e e e e e MP3 Info function ID3 TAG Folder selection previous next Track selection forward backward Fast forward rewind through tracks MP3 Display function display of folder name ID3 TAG information time elapsed since the start of the track name of the file Playing audio or data CD CD R and CD RW Audio Section e e e Mute pause function Soft mute function Loudness function Graphic 7 band equalizer if equipped e Separate bass treble tone adjustment e Right left channel balancing e Front rear fader Functions And Adjustments Turning The Car Radio On The car radio comes on when the
69. on the instrument panel below the radio Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flashers When the switch is activated all direc tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers Do not use this emergency warning system when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action On the highways slow down Incity traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat f
70. on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size Height Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who have out grown the height or weight limit of their rear facing child restraint Forward Facing Child Restraint with a five point Harness facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Larger Children Children who have out grown their forward facing child restraint but are too small to properly fit the vehicle s seat belt Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Children Too Large for Child Restraints Children 12 years old or younger who have out grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Vehicle Seat Belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
71. play the next track The tracks are selected cyclically the first track is selected after the last track and vice versa If the track has been played for more than 3 seconds pressing the 4 button starts the track again from the beginning In this case if you want to play the previous track press the lt button twice consecutively Track Fast Forward Rewind Keep the P button pressed down to fast forward the selected track and keep the 4 button pressed down to fast rewind the track The fast forward rewind will stop once the button is released Pause Function To pause the CD player press the A button The word ing CD Pause appears on the display To resume listening to the track press the A button again CD MP3 Player Introduction This chapter describes the operation of the CD MP3 player NOTE Layer 3 audio decoding technology is licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE MP3 Mode In addition to playing regular audio CDs the radio is also enabled to play CDROMs on which compressed audio files have been recorded in an MP3 format To guarantee optimal reproduction it is advisable to use good quality CDs burned at the lowest speed possible The files on an MP3 CD are structured in folders that create lists of all the folders containing MP3 tracks folders or subfolders are all on the same level The folders that do not contain MP3 tracks canno
72. pressure car washes as they can dam age the top material Also increased water pressure may force past the weather strips Remove any standing water from the top and dry the surface before opening it Operating the top opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicles interior Continued CAUTION Continued Use care when washing the vehicle water pressure directed at the weather strip seals may cause water to leak into the vehicles interior Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended Regular washing of the top will enhance its life and appearance and make successive cleanings easier Do not subject the top to excessive heat Frequently vacuum the top and storage compartment Washing Hand washing is highly recommended Automatic car washing equipment can damage the top material If you must use an automatic car wash soft cloth systems are preferred a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365 CAUTION Avoid high pressure car washes as they can damage the top material Also increased water pressure may force water past the weather strips General Cleaning Careful vacuuming of the top before washing is helpful in removing dust and other foreign particles Wash in partial shade instead of direct sun Wet the entire vehicle before washing the top The top should be washed with a soft natural bristle scrub brush and a mild soap solution such as li
73. prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is ad equate With the engine off and cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be be tween the bottom and top lines marked COLD FILL RANGE As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac tory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month 352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle Chec
74. rating of 87 For optimum performance and fuel economy the use of 91 octane or higher is recommended RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATH mAn ME TMOG Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline with the appropriate octane rating for your engine before consid ering service for the vehicle 280 STARTING AND OPERATING HN CAUTION Do not use gasoline containing Methanol or E 85 Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 1076 Ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle Ethanol Use of these b
75. reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs All Season Tires If Equipped All Season tires provide traction for all seasons spring summer fall and winter Traction levels may vary be tween different all season tires All season tires can be identified by the M S M amp S M S or MS designation on ee STARTING AND OPERATING 265 the tire sidewall Use all season tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped Summer tires provide traction in
76. regular intervals Fill the reservoir with wind shield washer solvent not engine coolant antifreeze Refer to Engine Compartment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required 346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN WARNING CAUTION Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system
77. repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Fuel Filler Cap 204 STARTING AND OPERATING HN CAUTION WARNING Continued Never add fuel when the engine is running It may cause the MIL to turn on and could cause a fire e Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impu rities into the fuel system Also a poorly fitting A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling aftermarket cap can cause the Malfunction Indi cator Light MIL to illuminate due to fuel vapors escaping from the system NOTE To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full WARNING Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the Tighten the gas cap about 1 4 turn until you hear one click This is an indication that the cap is properly tightened vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled If the gas cap is not tightened properly the MIL will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time Continued the vehicle is refueled A STARTING AND OPERATING 285 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel has been added the vehicle diagnostic syste
78. required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized studio or qualified repair center Continued CAUTION Continued e Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter vals Do not use chemical flushes in these compo nents as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission or air conditioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunc tion use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 333 CAUTION Do not overfill the engine with oil Overfilling the engine with oil wil
79. should be checked In order to assure brake system performance all brake when performing under hood services or immediately if system components should be inspected periodically the Brake Warning Light is on 7 Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake 354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN fluid reservoir Fluid level can be expected to fall as the Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re brake pads wear The brake fluid level should be checked fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main when the pads are replaced However low fluid level taining Your Vehicle for further information may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed 1 NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a manual trans WARNING mission the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake the brake system and the clutch release system The two fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine systems are separated in the reservoir and a leak in one Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further system will not affect the other system The manual information Using the wrong type of brake fluid transmission clutch release system should not require can severely damage your brake system and or f
80. solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363 When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner i The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are directly on the mirror molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care Instrument Panel Cover must be taken
81. starts playing the first track Press the 4 button with the radio turned on to activate the motorized CD ejection system After ejection the last audio source listened to before playing the CD will be heard If the CD is not removed from the radio it will automati cally be reloaded about 20 seconds later but will not resume playing until the MEDIA button is pressed to select the CD mode The radio will switch to the last source prior to CD mode The CD cannot be ejected if the radio is off Possible Error Messages If the loaded CD cannot be read e g a CD ROM has been inserted or the CD is inserted the wrong way or there is a reading error the display shows the wording CD Disc error The CD will then be ejected and the audio source activated before the CD mode selection will be heard A CD which cannot be read will not be ejected until these functions are over At the end with the CD mode activated the display will show the wording CD Disc error for a few seconds and then the CD will be ejected a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 Display Information When the CD player is operating information will ap pear on the display with the following meaning e Track 5 indicates the CD track number e 03 42 indicates the time elapsed since the start of the track if the relevant Menu function is activated Track Selection Briefly press the 4 button to play the previous CD track and the button to
82. the key with either side up To lock the door turn the key to the right To unlock the door turn the key to the left Refer to Body Lubrication in Maintaining Your Vehicle for maintenance information Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF LOCK sounds a signal to remove the key SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MH NOTE A key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the key is turned to the ON RUN position it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics CAUTION Always remove the Sentry Key from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not com patible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result i
83. to avoid scratching the plastic The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be minimizes reflections on the windshield Do not use used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive protectants or other products which may cause undesir cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp able reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the rag low glare surface 2 Dry with a soft cloth Instrument Panel Bezels Seat Belt Maintenance CAUTION Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical 7 solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve Sun damage can also weaken the fabric hicle read the installation instructions carefully Some air fresheners will damage the finish of If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to contact any surface wash them Dry with a soft cloth 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Convertible Top Care If Equipped NOTE Lubricate the top rails with Berulub FR 43 every 2000 cycles or if scratching noises due to dust are present CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage stains or mildew on the top material Avoid high
84. two minutes Each time the lever is pulled the activation of the lights will be extended by 30 seconds The activation of the lights can be extended to a maximum of 210 seconds Deactivation Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel and hold it for more than two seconds Interior Lights The interior light switches are located in the overhead console The interior lights can be set to three different positions Off Left Position Center Position On Right Position Using the switch on the left overhead press the switch to the right from its center position and the lights are always on Press the switch to the left from its center position and the lights are always off Leave the switch in the center position and the lights are turned on and off when the doors are opened or closed The switch on the right side of the overhead console controls the map or reading function of the lights Press the switch to the right to turn on the right light and press the switch to the left to turn on the left light a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 CAUTION When the doors are unlocked with Key Fob a 10 second timer is activated Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the When the doors are locked with the Key Fob the lights will turn off Interior Light Timing On Right Position m e When all doors are closed a 15 minute timer is activated switch is in the center position or that the lights a
85. value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information A STARTING AND OPERATING 277 Check TPMS Warnings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected an audible chime will be activated and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Unavailable text message will display If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not moni tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road ram tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warn 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects r
86. viscosity is OK the light will turn off and the engine will be allowed to crank If the measured oil viscosity is too high engine cranking will be disabled and the light will blink repeatedly until the oil temperature is raised preferably by an externally powered electric engine block heater available from your authorized studio The message Plug In Engine Heater will be displayed in the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is below 5 F 15 C at the time the engine is shut off as a reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold start UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141 2 Rear Defrost Button Press and release this button to turn on the rear window defroster This indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 20 minutes CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Continued 142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL II 6 ParklHeadlight ON Indicator Follow Me Home CAUTION ACON Headlight Delay Indicator If Equipped e Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on
87. wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode Refer to Electronic Stability Con trol ESC in this section for further information Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop ona hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes his foot off the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 2 5 manual transmission or 7 grade or greater automatic transmission hill Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction i e vehicle in NEUTRAL manual transmission vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear 246 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 8
88. will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers 051110796 Shift Lever 226 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears The transmission shift lever has PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL DRIVE and AutoStick shift positions Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control refer to AutoStick in Starting and Operating for further information Moving the shift lever forward or rearward while in the AutoStick position beside the DRIVE position will manually select the transmis sion gear and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 6 5 4 3 2 1 Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may place the shift lever in PARK first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before pl
89. you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the number of reasons A child or others could be parking brake shift the transmission into PARK seriously or fatally injured Children should be and remove the ignition key Once the key is warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal removed the shift lever is locked in the PARK or the shift lever position securing the vehicle against unwanted Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or movement in a location accessible to children A child could When leaving the vehicle always remove the igni operate power windows other controls or move tion key and lock your vehicle the vehicle Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 229 CAUTION Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK OFF position to the ON RUN position and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position When shifting into PARK firmly move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
90. 4 km h max speed 15 miles 24 km max distance Front OK OK Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 321 Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose following equip ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN position not the ACC position If the ignition key is unavailable or the battery is discharged see Shift Lever Override in What To Do In Emergencies for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK for towing CAUTION DO NOT use sling type equipment when towing When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Dam age to your vehicle may result from improper towing Automatic Transmission e Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated e Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck all wheels off the ground mm 322 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN CAUTION DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission Damage to the drivetrain will result Towing this v
91. 839 Mechanical Key Release Button 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 Rotate the screw located on the side of the Key Fob using a small screwdriver 021336637 Battery Case Removed 021441822 4 Refit the battery case inside the Key Fob and turn the Key Fob Screw Location screw to lock it into place 3 Take out the battery case Remove and replace the battery observing its polarity a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 DOOR LOCKS WARNING The door locks can be manually locked or unlocked from a inside the vehicle by using the door handle If the door Do not leave children or animals inside parked handle is pushed a red lock indicator will show on the vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may door handle indicating locked when the door is closed cause serious injury or death tha door will lock For personal security and safety in the event of an collision lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and re move the Key Fob from the ignition When leaving the vehicle always lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Continued 021835847 Door Lock Handle 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM WARNING Continued Allowing children to be in a v
92. ANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 The media player enables the following operations e Digital Audio Playback you can play all your digital audio files mp3 wma wav aac or play a customized playlist m3u or wpl format Audio File Selection By Category you can play all audio files of a certain category e g album artist or genre Playback Options while playing tracks you can select the following options Play Stop Next track Previous track Shuffle and Loop track NOTE The media player does not support audio files com pressed with other formats and DRM Digital Right Management protected audio files Non supported audio files that may be present on the USB device will be ignored To use the media player you have to simply connect directly or by an extension lead your USB device to the car USB port After turning the ignition key to ON BLUE amp ME will start building your media library At the end of this operation you can surf the complete library and scroll its categories as required using the buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands BLUE amp ME will then play your selection via the car sound system 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x WARNING Operating certain parts of this system while driv ing can distract your attention away from the road and possibly cause an accident or other serious consequences for this reason certain functions shall be dis
93. And Turn Signal US ct Ota iseweds cp 366 AE io i Underhood Fuses er Eire s es 368 center Pagh Mounted Stop Katai CHEE fo E VEHICLE STORAGE LL LLL 370 B FLUID CAPACITIES 4a adr dre Eres 376 E FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND M REPLACEMENT BOLBE quitting ids GENUINE PARTS 2 566 eee e Rn 377 B BULB REPLACEMENT i451 Ve ane sale 372 Enpine caer eid gall ay eR Rus 377 c iA Panama ER eres ae ove Chassis 3 x devas eda ne ees 378 a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 327 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 1 4L 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 Battery 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 6 Air Cleaner Filter 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 Engine Oil Fill 4 Front Distribution Unit Fuses 8 Washer Fluid Reservoir 328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 1 4L TURBO 074664691 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 Battery 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 6 Engine Oil Fill 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 4 Front Distribution Unit Fuses a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 329 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations
94. Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the air bag system The diagnos tics also record the nature of the malfunction a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 WARNING Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized studio service the air bag system immediately Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags Different air bag inflation rates are possible based on several factors including the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size Th
95. Belts All the seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with combination lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in a collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Continued WARNING Continued Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into on
96. Call for assistance NOTE If the Mode Select Knob 5 is on Air Mode and the pump is operating air will dispense from the Air Pump Hose 7 only not the Sealant Hose 6 If the sealant white fluid does flow through the Sealant Hose 6 1 Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer flowing through hose typically takes 30 70 seconds As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose 6 the Pressure Gauge 3 can read as high as 70 psi 5 Bar The Pressure Gauge 3 will decrease quickly from approxi mately 70 psi 5 Bar to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle 1 is empty The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi ately after the Sealant Bottle 1 is empty Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver side latch pillar recommended pressure Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge 3 If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes The tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 299 NOTE If the tire becomes over inflated press the Defla tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom mended inflation pressure before continuing If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes 1 2 Press the Power Butto
97. DIO CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 045033001 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM SAT CD AUX Media Player etc and can also be used to select enter an item while scrolling through menu The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Operation Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once wil
98. EHICLE 93 your mobile phone manually and visually using the For further details on the mobile phones supported by steering wheel controls and the instrument panel multi BLUE amp MET refer to section BLUERME SUPPORTED function display MOBILE PHONES To get started with BLUE amp ME hands free kit with voice recognition you have to simply pair your Bluetooth wireless technology enabled mobile phone with the system Pairing is an operation that has to be made only once NOTE During the mobile phone pairing procedure BLUE amp ME attempts to detect a phone equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology within range and then establishes the connection using a Personal Iden tification Number PIN 1 Mute ESC 2 Phone Menu Once your phone is paired you have the option to 4 Voice Recognition VR 3 Phone Hang Up transfer your mobile phone contacts to the hands free kit to make a phone call either by using the contacts 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME list or directly pronouncing the phone number to answer a call and also to answer another incoming phone call e To interact with BLUE amp ME you can use either the buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands With voice recognition you can perform system functions by speaking voice commands also identified as key words When the system recognizes a keyword it will respond with the appropriate action Voice recognition
99. ELECTRONIC PROGRAM BRAKE SPULO CONTROL ASSIST SYSTEM e BRAKE BRAKE SYSTEM MILL DESCENT WARNING PARKING CONTROL BRAKE w 5 ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTLOCK ORIVE BRAKING SYSTEM 4WD BRAKE systtw FOUR WHET WARNING PARKING ORNE RAKE TOW UL WARNING TOW HAUL 4 LOW HAZARD kon ne AIC PUSH 2 AR ELECTRONIC 010533317 INTRODUCTION 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire Owners Manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cau tions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This number also appears engraved on the right front door sill under the sill scuff plate on an adhesive label applied to the right door opening on the B Pillar on the vehicle registration and title Vehicle Identification Number 8 INTRODUCTION VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death gt 010862580 Stamped VIN Location NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN THINGS TO KNO
100. EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmit pa ter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system T 020235839 Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter With Mechanical Key Release Button 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Mn NOTE The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and the liftgate The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors 1st Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information To Lock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors and the liftgate The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal If a door is ajar the turn signal lights will flash at an increased rate and the
101. ERING The electric power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving If the electric steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing assist you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle manually WARNING Continued operation with reduced or no power steer ing assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as pos sible If the Steering icon is flashing it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to an authorized studio for service It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance If the Steering icon is displayed and the POWER STEER ING SYSTEM OVER TEMP message is displayed on the EVIC screen they indicate that extreme steering maneu vers may have occurred which caused an over tempera ture condition in the power steering system Once driv ing conditions are safe pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few moments until the icon and message turn off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion If the Steering icon is displayed and the SERVICE POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF message is displayed the EVIC screen they indicate the vehicle needs to be taken to an authorized studio for service
102. IM NOTE The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags are certified to new Federal regulations for Advanced Air Bags The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to allow the air bags to have different inflation levels based on several factors including the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation level of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation level of the Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window The SABIC are located above the side windows The trim covering the SABIC is labeled SRS AIRBAG This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB The SAB are marked with an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats NOTE Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e After any collision the vehicle should be taken to an authorized studio immediately Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system c
103. Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANC button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 25 mph 40 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES 4 button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Pressing the
104. Modifications to any part of the air bag system 2 could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the air bags seat belt pretensioners and the front seat belt retrac tor assemblies replaced by an authorized studio immediately Also have the Occupant Restraint Con troller ORC system serviced as well modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards e It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system Continued 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Continued Air Bag Warning Light Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag e You will want to have the air bags ready to j inflate f ion i lision Th system The air bag may inflate accidentally or may NA 7 ale ior your propecia Ina CONS ne not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized studio for any air bag system service If your seat including your Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and intercon
105. NG A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve Correct the tire pressure as required hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Spare Tire Stowage the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immedi ately 11 Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible a Reverse instructions of the spare removal section 10 Place the deflated flat tire in the cargo area Have the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible Rotate the jack wrench tool on the winch drive nut clockwise until effort becomes heavy and an audible click is heard indicating the spare is properly stowed a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 313 CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack wrench extension tool only Use of air wrench or power tool may damage the winch JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury CAUTION Do not use a por
106. NG The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Reactive Head Restraints Front Seats The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with Reactive Head Restraints In the event of a rear impact the Reactive Head Restraints will automatically extend forward minimizing the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the Reactive Head Restraint To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint Push Button The Reactive Head Restraints will automatically return to their normal position following a rear impact If the Reactive Head Restraints do not return to their normal position see your authorized studio immediately a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 NOTE The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized studio WARNING Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head Restraint such as coats
107. ORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the seat belt in a rear seat Use this simple 5 step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle s seat belt alone 1 Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat 2 Do the child s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat while they are still sitting all the way back 3 Does the shoulder belt cross the child s shoulder between their neck and arm 4 Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible touching the child s thighs and not their stomach 5 Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip If the answer to any of these questions was no then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle If the child is using the lap shoulder belt check belt fit peri odically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Use any attachment method shown with an X Below
108. Remove any standing water from the top and dry If your power convertible top does not operate in the the surface before opening it Operating the top Auto Open Close mode automatically opening to the opening a door or lowering a window whilethetop 1 4 open and 3 4 open comfort stops or if the trunk lid is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicles does not open the following relearn procedure may be interior necessary Use care when washing the vehicle water pressure directed at the weather strip seals may cause water to leak into the vehicles interior 1 Confirm that the door trunk lid are closed 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME 2 Begin with the top in the fully closed position using manual mode 3 Hold the OPEN button to move the top to the fully open position 4 CONTINUE to hold the OPEN button for an addi tional three seconds 5 Release the OPEN button 6 Hold the CLOSED button to move the top to the fully closed position 7 CONTINUE to hold the CLOSED button until the top begins to cycle fully open then release the CLOSED button At the end of Step 7 the top will automatically cycle to the fully open position and then close to the 1 4 open position This will confirm that the relearn procedure was success ful Auto Open Close will now be functional Trunk lid operation will be functional NOTE DO NOT interrupt this activity If the power convertible top does n
109. Restraint Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a for ward facing child restraint up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat Yes Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is al lowed if the child restraint manu facturer also allows contact Can the head restraints be removed Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint Yes all Yes In positions with cinching latch plates CINCH the buckle stalk may be twisted up to 3 full turns Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor Installing A Child Restraint with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR 1 Place the child seat in the center of the seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat Tolock the seat belt pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out
110. System ABS The Four Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking con ditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces The system s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to provide regulated hydraulic pressure The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation which is normal The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light When the light is illuminated the ABS is not functioning The system reverts to standard non anti lock brakes Turning the ignition Off and On again may reset the ABS if the fault detected was only momentary ee STARTING AND OPERATING 243 WARNING Pumping the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner w
111. This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or CAUTION vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require ments can cause severe transmission damage Dam age from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS E HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS 291 MI JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING Bop VOUENONEOTEEEBATST delo mica soy EQUIPPED A 302 M TIREFT KIT 5 eee 292 Jack LOS SHOP d eee itecto ae TIREFIT Storage 0 esses 292 Spe TERE va iee TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation 293 Fispatstioss kor Jacking TIREFIT Usage Precautions 294 A SBUCHIUS podio librata nda Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT 296 Spare TIG SHOWERS Hint orth cad dique 290 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN Bl JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE 313 M TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE 320 Preparations For Jump Start 314 Automatic Transmission sss 321 Jump Starting Procedure 316 Manual Transmission 0005 322 Bl FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE 317 M ENHANCED ACCIDENT E SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE 319 RESPONSE SYSTEM 2 004 se nnn 322 a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 291 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located
112. W BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS 11 Ignition Key Removal sess 11 Locking Doors With A Key 13 Key In Ignition Reminder 13 M SENTRY KEY9 0 00 00 agtis 13 Replacement Keys o o o o o oo oo ooo ooo 14 General Information o o o oooo oooo 15 E REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IE EQUIPPED 4 es eR REIR RES RS 15 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate 16 Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors Idi CTI 16 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate 16 Programming Additional Transmitters 16 General Information 00 16 Transmitter Battery Replacement 17 DOOR LOCKS 2 antec ain oe 19 O Power Door Locks lisse 200005 20 POWER WINDOWS seres 21 Power Window Switches 21 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MI B LITGATE 32 rex cra 23 Advanced Front Air Bag Features 39 ll OCCUPANT RESTRA NTS o ooo como ooo 24 Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls 43 Lap Shoulder BeltSs o o o o o o o 2 Event Data Recorder EDR 53 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 32 Child Restraints
113. W BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 NOTE Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accor dance with local laws POWER WINDOWS Power Window Switches There are single window controls located on the shifter bezel below the climate controls which operate the driver and passenger door windows The window con trols will operate when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death L Power Window Switches Auto Down If Equipped The driver s door window switch may have an Auto Down feature Press the window switch for approxi mately one second release and the window will go a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 down automatically To cancel the Auto Down move ment operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof ope
114. a Sear a eos Yu esed E 292 Tire Markings Puis d a p e bdo ea e pas 250 TCS uode en dheR eee haga dd ve E bes mao N d ines 79 Aging Life of Tires lees 269 Air Pressure ucraniana hes RR quus 261 Chains aues Sa deus pae E a des 271 Changing estirarse eed RIS es 302 Compact Spare 6 llle 266 General Information 000000 261 High Speed uer ee ea Ge bes Inflation Pressures JACKING GSS aus eem Rem em em Paes 302 Life of Tires tara ee dre as 269 Load Capacity ose ri b RR RS 256 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 273 Pressure Warning Light 144 Quality Grading score alka dae ta 391 Radial vicio cion pia RR ERR e pw Red s 264 Replacement simo ooo pee Aged oma ds 269 Rotation scope a om EUER e RS 272 Safety serrera ede ea surp i eR ER SEG E 250 opo cms 252 Snow Ties i c oe rr e RE RA as 265 Spinning cocida ee das 267 Tread Wear Indicators ooooooooo 268 Tire Safety Information lille 250 To Open Hood ess odo ope ERR ER 106 llo nup 285 Disabled Vehicle sess 320 Recreational aos a eant art dea 286 TEACDOD a 3o ora aora EES ba a YR 233 Traction Control 2 ees 245 Trailer Towing seien ber hm ERE dae 285 Transaxle Automatic use CR Ades eae eia XE OX xa 11 Autostck uua doa we PARRA Hes ETT de 232 Transmission Automatic lees 223 El ld uuum ERE VERG UNS ae eS 356 Maintenance leen 356 Marti l sess
115. abled by the BLUE amp ME system until driving conditions are secure and if required only when the car is stopped Read and Follow Instructions before using your system read and follow all instructions and safety information provided in this User s Guide Not following precautions found in this User s Guide can lead to an accident or other serious conse quences Continued WARNING Continued Keep the User s Guide in the car when kept in the car the User s Guide will be a ready reference for you and other users unfamiliar with the system Please make certain that before using the system for the first time all persons have access to the User s Guide and read its instructions and safety information carefully EE A X UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 SEATS Front Seats Forward Rearward Adjustment Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats near vehicle the floor WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and us
116. abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Keep all objects a safe distance from the window UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS ll INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 139 Bl INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 140 ll INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 141 ll ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC 000000 152 EVIG Displays iis RR sons 153 EVIC Control Buttons o o o o oo o 154 O Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Setup Menus s s erp des 155 Change Engine Oil Indicator System 156 Trip Computer 6 6 0 eee eee eee 157 Trip Buttons xao es pev ere xs Trip Functions Values Displayed o ooooomo o o o 159 Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features 160 E SALES CODE RAB RADIO 171 O Introduction 2 2 a xs 171 Suggestions ccce seed hn n 171 Technical Specifications 173 138 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN Quick Guide six exe nes 175 M STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS 198 General Informati0N o o oooooooo 178 Radio Operation oooooooooooooooo o 199 Functions And Adjustments 179 CD Player Operation asama Hecesi madi des 199 Radio iuo Eee hog dosis 186 Operating
117. ace or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfer ing with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Continued a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 WARNING Continued qun mcm Checks You Should Make Outside Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have Tires 2o been removed for cleaning Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Ob lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle Check the wheel bolts for tightness Check the tires control including spare for proper cold inflation pressure e If required mounting posts must be properly in stalled if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
118. acing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precau tion turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade ee STARTING AND OPERATING 227 WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle Continued WARNING Continued e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued 228 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Continued WARNING Continued Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to
119. act call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized studio has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 389 WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other re
120. ad of your vehicle a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 295 Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by the hoses WARNING Continued WARNING If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the TIREFIT kit Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1 4 in 6 mm or larger If the tire has any sidewall damage If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire If the wheel has any damage Continued the wheel Keep TIREFIT away from open flames or heat source e A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place provided Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Continued 296 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN WARNING Continued Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT e Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to A Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT come in contact with hair eyes or clothing TIRE 1 Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle s FIT is harmful if inhaled swallowed or absorbed
121. adio wave signals Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings ing limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still turn ON due to the low tire However after driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 278 STARTING AND OPERATING HN 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Enhanced System If Equipped When the vehicle is equipped with an enhanced TPM system the driver can view text messages showing the actual tire pressure value by position by selecting the tire pressure menu command in the instrument cluster Refer to the instrument panel features section of the owners manual General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
122. ag accio uet ttr ot ie marin 283 Adding Washer Fluid llle 345 Additives Fuel llle 282 AIDDagessec sues e era 37 Airbag Deployment sbe ssnssi rasse adapa ania 50 Airbag Eight iuris a miT id 44 Airbag Maintenance llle 51 Airbag Side esed ate RHEIN AER qoi 40 Airbag Window Side Curtain 41 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 336 Air Conditioner Maintenance 338 Air Conditioning 0 6 0 0 60 eee 201 Air Conditioning ControlS 201 Air Conditioning Filter 339 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 338 Air Conditioning Systemi os as es tacea ter maa 201 Air Pressure Tires 0 0 0 262 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 8 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 0 349 Capacities sos sia bow S aided Ren Say PUR nena ta 376 Disposal ooo rio e EX e Re RE 351 Anti Lock Brake System ABS o o o o o 242 Anti Lock Warning Light 149 Appearance Care losa aa ee dna ER RC deua 358 Automatic Dimming Mirror 0 87 Automatic Door Locks o o oooo oooo o 21 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 203 Automatic Transaxle 0 0 cee ee eee 11 Automatic Transmission eese 223 Adding Fluid i cece nnn 357 Fluid and Filter Changes 358 Fluid Level Check o oo o o o ooo oo 357 Fluid Type
123. ain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light 276 STARTING AND OPERATING HN e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System V This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the 4 instrument cluster The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi nate in the instrument cluster an audible chime will be activated and the Check left or right front rear tire xxx x psi text message will display when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure
124. ard to its last fore aft memory track position as described in Memory function option 1 Heated Seats If Equipped On some models the front driver and passenger seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks The controls for the front heated seats are located on the center instrument panel area Press the switch once to turn on the heated seats Press the switch a second time to shut the heating elements off NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface tempera ture of the seat Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear WARNI
125. arning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal If tire pressure is less than 19 psi 1 3 Bar the tire is too to you your passengers and others around you badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance E After Driving Pull over to a safe location Refer to Whenever You Stop to Use TIREFIT before continuing 1 Press the Power Button 4 to turn on TIREFIT and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and 1 Turn the Mode Select Knob 5 to the Air Mode loading information label on the driver side door If the tire pressure is 19 psi 1 3 bar or higher position opening 2 Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the NOTE If the tire becomes over inflated press the Defla vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom mended inflation pressure before continuing a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 301 2 Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem F Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 i XUnepi he Sealant Hose 8 darno Volt outlet 2 Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the vehicle Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at an authorized studio or tire service center Replace the Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 assembly at your autho
126. as a reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold start CAUTION Use of the recommended SAE 5W 30 oil and adher ing to the prescribed oil change intervals is important to prevent engine damage and ensure satisfactory starting in cold conditions ee STARTING AND OPERATING 219 If Engine Fails To Start CAUTION WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing b engine has started ignite and damage the converter serious personal injury and vehicle To prevent damage to the starter do not continu ously crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up 220 STARTING AND OPERATING MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED Five Speed Manual Transmission WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied The parking brake should al ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline Shift Lever Fully press the
127. at Causes Corrosion e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of and Tar Remover to remove paint and protective coatings from your vehicle Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR The most common causes are A Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint Stone and gravel impact Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing e Insects tree sap and tar that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish Salt in the air near seacoast localities CAUTION Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing such as steel wool or scouring powder that will e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve scratch metal and painted surfaces hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with can result in damage or removal of paint and decals clear water 360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Special Care e If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive packaged and sealed near the ocean
128. at prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position damage to the wiper motor may occur A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Rear Windshield Wiper Rotate the end of the windshield wiper washer lever upward to the first detent past the intermittent settings for intermittent wipe operation With the front wind shield wiper active rotate the end of the windshield wiper washer lever upward The rear wiper will operate in the same mode as the front windshield wipers but at half the frequency When the transmission is shifted into REVERSE the rear wiper will automatically operate at Low Speed and return to normal operation when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE 031570084 Rear Wiper Operation NOTE The windshield wipers washers will only oper ate with the ignition in the ON RUN position 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rear Windshield Washer Operation Push the windshield wiper washer lever toward the instrument panel to activate the rear washer Push and hold the lever for more than a half second and the wipers will activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is released TILT STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward The tilt control lever is located on the left side of the steering column
129. ation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres sure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation Do not reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low 264 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and
130. ators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be 1 Worn Tire replaced 2 New Tire These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced ee STARTING AND OPERATING 269 Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to Driving style e Tire pressure Distance driven Performance tires tires with a speed rating of V or higher and summer tires typically have a reduced tread life Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main tenance schedule is highly recommended WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and perfor
131. be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a position The key can only be removed from the ignition number of reasons A child or others could be when the ignition is in the OFF position and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Continued Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are applied To move the shift lever out of PARK the ignition switch must be turned to the ON RUN position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Six Speed Automatic Transmission The shift lever position display located in the instrument cluster indicates the transmission gear range You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK Refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System in this section To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new STARTING AND OPERATING 225 vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts
132. can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con tact anything that can burn The catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine perfor mance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347 Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop
133. cement Tires onnaa anaa 269 Reporting Safety Defects onanan anan 389 Restraints Child o 54 Rotation ire csi nh hh Oech tada a 272 406 INDEX IN Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 77 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 79 Safety Defects Reporting o oooooooo oo 389 Safety Exhaust GaS o o o o oo ooo ooo oooooo 76 Safety Information Tir8 o o o o 250 Safety Mpio a a tr da 75 Schedule Maintenance 0 000000 ee 380 Seat Belt Maintenance 0 0000 eee 363 Seat Belt Reminder 0 0 00000000 35 Seat Bellis ria Ghd ee Yee E aes 77 And Pregnant Women llle 37 Child Restraint llle een 54 Extender o dues Der res dae eda 36 Front eat os whee Gates Geek Head a REUS 27 Inspection sone garp aoni REX RETURN s 77 PretensionerS o oooooooooomom o ooo 35 Reat 2s icem prae O ate 27 Untwisting Procedure o o o oooo ooo ooo 32 Seat Belts Seda ooooooooooomoo 24 SS a Ea e do 99 Adjustment add RES due wale A Dare aaa 99 Heated retene donde ada 102 Sentry Key Immobilizer 13 Service Assistance ee 386 Service Contractes sra arab RU RC ds 388 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator 146 Service Manuals 0 000 ee nee 390 Shift Lever Override lle 319 Shift Speeds Manual Transmission 222 Shoulder Belts
134. cian should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in the instrument cluster all warnings including door and gate and Change Engine Oil will only be displayed in the EVIC display For additional information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC for further information 152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 27 Fuel Gauge Fuel Door Reminder ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER The fuel door reminder indicates that the fuel filler door EME is located on the right side of the vehicle When the The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea ignition switch is in the ON RUN position the digital tures a driver interactive display that is located in the scale will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel instrument cluster tank NOTE The fuel gauge and range will not immediately update accurately when refueling with the engin
135. cked at this time CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 339 WARNING Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized studio or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system for further warranty information sealers stop leak products seal conditioners compressor The air conditioning system contains refrigerant il and refrigerants under high pressure To avoid tisk of personal AIC Air Filter injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician WARNING Do not remove the A C air filter while the blower
136. clutch pedal before you shift gears As you release the clutch pedal lightly press the accelerator pedal NOTE To shift into REVERSE from NEUTRAL lift the ring under the knob and at the same time move the gearshift lever to the right and then backward A STARTING AND OPERATING 221 Use each gear in numerical order do not skip a gear Be sure the transmission is in first gear not third when starting from a standing position Damage to the clutch can result from starting in third gear For most city driving you will find it easier to use only the lower gears For steady highway driving with light accelerations fifth gear is recommended Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal and never try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged This will cause abnormal wear on the clutch REVERSE gear is not synchronized and the vehicle must be at a complete stop to shift into REVERSE gear When selecting REVERSE gear the driver should pause ap proximately 2 seconds after pushing in the clutch pedal and prior to shifting into REVERSE which allows gears to stop spinning Should an unwanted clash noise be pro duced the pause length should be increased NOTE e Clashing REVERSE gear especially if vehicle is mov ing can result in transmission damage e During cold weather until the transmission lubricant is warm you may experience slightly higher shift efforts This is normal and not
137. contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as neces sary MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 343 Rear Wiper Blade Removal Installation 1 Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward this will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the liftgate glass e al 072607741 1 Wiper Arm 2 Pivot Cap 344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully up ward unless the pivot cap is raised first po 2 Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper y mo blade off of the liftgate glass 3 Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade holder Wav 072607742 1 Wiper Blade 2 Blade Pivot Pin 3 Wiper Arm 4 Wiper Blade Holder a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345 4 Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade holder at the end of the wiper arm and firmly press the wiper blade until it snaps into place 5 Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into place Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment and the fluid level should be checked at
138. coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze solution Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349 Selection Of Coolant CAUTION Continued Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional CAUTIONI rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant an tifreeze is not recommended Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified Organic Additive Technology OAT en gine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection Organic Additive Technology OAT engine cool
139. ded nut by rotating it counter clockwise 060536586 gt Spare Tire 060536588 Plastic Molded Nut 306 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN 5 Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it Preparations For Jacking through the center of the wheel 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface avoiding ice or slippery areas WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers 3 Set the parking brake Retainer 4 Place the shift lever in PARK automatic transmission or REVERSE manual transmission 5 Turn Off the ignition WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 307 6 Block both the front and rear of the WARNING Continued wheel diagonally opposite the jack ing position For example if chang Always park on a firm level surface as far from the ing the right front tire block the left edge of the roadway as possible before raising the rear wheel vehicle ee e Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle be raised while the vehicle is being jacked e Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in Jacking Instructions REVERSE e Never start or run the engine with the v
140. defrost and side window demister outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions It allows you to stay comfortable while keeping the windshield clear Defrost Mode gv Air comes from the windshield and side window demister outlets Use Defrost mode with maxi mum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting When the defrost mode is selected the blower will automatically default to medium high ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 NOTE While operating in the other modes the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog mist or ice on the windshield Defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass Air Conditioning A C The Air Conditioning A C button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system When in A C mode with the ATC set to a cool temperature dehumidified air flows through the air outlets If Economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn off the A C mode in the ATC display and deactivate the A C system NOTE e If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode the A C can be turned off but the A C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select Defrost mode and increase blower speed Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke odors or c high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish t
141. dle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Bulbs Bulb Number Overhead Lamp C5W Courtesy Lamp W5W Exterior Bulbs Bulb Number Front Low and High HIR2 Beam Headlamp Front Parking Daytime W21 5W Running Lamps Front Fog Lamps H11 Front Side Marker Lamps W3W Front Turn Signal Lamps WY21W Side Direction Lamps W5W Rear Turn Signal Lamps PY21W Rear Side Marker Lamps W3W Rear Tail and Stop PY21W 5W Lamps Rear Backup Lamps W16W 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Bulb Number Center High Mounted W5W Stop Lamp License Plate Lamps LED See Authorized studio NOTE Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized studio If a bulb needs to be replaced visit your authorized studio or refer to the applicable Service Manual BULB REPLACEMENT Headlamps 1 Remove the plastic cap from the back of the headlamp housing 2 Rotate the bulb counter clockwise 3 Remove the bulb and replace as needed 4 Install the bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in place 5 Reinstall the plastic cap a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 Front Turn Signal Parking And Daytime Running 4 Rotate bulb socket counter clockwise ramps 5 Re
142. e Shift the transmission into PARK Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK OFF position 1 2 3 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized studio at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized studio has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur 232 STARTING AND OPERATING HN If the transmission cannot be reset authorized studio service is required AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control giving you more control of the vehicle AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving and many other situations Operation When the shift lever is in the AutoStick position beside the Drive position it can be moved forward and rear ward This allows the driver to manually select the transmission gear being used Moving the shift lever forward triggers a downshift and rearward an upshift The current gear will be displayed in the instru ment cluster NOTE In AutoStick mode
143. e post of the booster battery battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery Disconnect the opposite end of the positive 4 jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the positive post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized studio a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 317 CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved using a rocking motion Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE with automatic transmission or 2nd gear and REVERSE with manual transmission while gently press ing the accelerator Use
144. e another in a collision hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 2 The seat belt latch plate is along side the pillar near the 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out plate into the buckle until you hear a click the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap he Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Pulling Out The latch Plate 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE HI WARNING WARNING Continued A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more e A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal inju ries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you prop 4 erly In a sudden stop you could move too far likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap b
145. e effects Continued 236 STARTING AND OPERATING HN CAUTION Continued Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle s drivetrain components Always inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil trans mission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami nated as this may result in further damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stopping distances Therefore after driving through stand ing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded e Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your pas sengers and others around you Continued A STARTING AND OPERATING 237 POWER STE
146. e air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag In this way the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator Unit The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering column When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag The trim cover separates and folds out of the way allowing the air bag to inflate to the full size The air bag fully inflates in about 15 to 20 milliseconds The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag gas is vented through small vent holes in the side of the air bag Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SAB Inflator Units The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision Based on the severity and type of collision the side air bag inflator on the crash side of
147. e event of a collision These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occu pants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert to fasten their seat belts The feature is active whenever the ignition is on If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph 8 km h by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime Once the sequence starts it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened The driver should instruct all other occu
148. e if the Fader level adjustment is equal to R 9 Source Can Not Be Selected Nothing has been loaded Load the CD or the MP3 CD to be listened to CD Player The CD Does Not Play The CD is dirty Clean the CD The CD is scratched Try using another CD The CDCan Not Be Loaded A CD is already loaded Press the 4 button and remove the CD MPS File Reading Track Skips While Playing Mp3 Files The CD is scratched or dirty The Duration Of The Mp3 Tracks Is Not Correctly Displayed In some cases due to the recording mode the duration of the MP3 tracks can be displayed incorrectly Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to the appropriate BLUE amp ME User s Manual for further information Personal Portable Navigation Device PND If Equipped A Personal Portable Navigation Device PND is avail able as optional equipment for this vehicle refer to the Navigation User Guide for further information iPod USB MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL IF EQUIPPED This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port located in the glove compartment UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 044035855 1 iPod Or External USB Device Holder 2 Cable Jack 3 USB Connector Refer to the appropriate Blue amp Me radio User s Manual for iPod or external USB device support capability 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE STEERING WHEEL AU
149. e in cold weather Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for Children LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for Children Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Air Bag An air bag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi tion
150. e of window fogging Summer Operation NOTE In some cases during high temperature opera tion the air conditioning system performance may be reduced This is to help protect the engine from overheat ing during the high load condition Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an automatic recirculation system When the system senses a heavy load or high heat conditions it may use Recir culation A C mode to provide additional comfort while in automatic mode a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 Winter Operation When operating the system during the winter months make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of ice slush snow or other obstruc tions Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service ie vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air using the high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the air conditioning system is started again STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS B STARTING PROCEDURES o 0 xo coronadas 217 Dowt shib anrbesakekexr x33 Rev 222 Manual Transmission If Equipped 217 M AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Automatic Transmission If Equipped 217 A o ts O Normal Starting
151. e on 28 Tachometer The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage 29 Speedometer 040969992 The Speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per hour m ph and or kilometers per hour km h Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display The EVIC consists of the following EVIC Displays e System Status e Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays O Keron MC soon S Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features OL 888888 im e e Trip Computer Functions PTT TT ETT ETE a ABBE ro Io EL WO 1 Temperature Indicator 6 Message Display Outside Temperature Display e 8 B Be 2 Fuel Level Gauge 7 Coolant Temperature Gauge 3 Clock 8 Digital Speedometer 4 Odometer 9 Ice Warning Indicator 5 Sport Mode 10 Gear Shift Indicator GSI 154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL GA Boso F 888875 O d TTT TTT TTT IO OLE pur O NI SIS A 1 Ice Warning Indicator 2 Temperature Indicator 3 Fuel Level Gauge 4 Clock 5 Odometer 041065141 6 Message Display 7 Coolant Temperature Gauge 8 Digital Speedometer 9 Autostick Gear Indicator 10 Auto Sport ECO Indicator EVIC Control Buttons Press the SET ESC button briefly to access the menu and or go to
152. e rear seatbacks have a fold down feature to allow increased cargo capacity Push down the release button located at the outboard top of the seatback and move the seatback to its folded down position to provide a flat load floor cargo area When returning the seatback to its upright position push rearward until the seatback is properly latched Rear Seat Release Buttons 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located in the center of the instrument panel below the radio Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes To manually shut the defroster off push the button a second time NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating Folded Rear Seats a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or
153. e special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times including babies and children Every state in the United States and every Canadian province requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 WARNING www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana NING dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web In a collision an unrestrained child can become a site for additional information http www tc gc ca projectile inside the vehicle The force required to eng roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index 53 htm hold even an infant
154. e than 2 seconds the tuned station will be stored Pressing the A B C button will change between the preset memory group in the current frequency band Automatic Tuning Briefly press the 4 or gt gt button to start the automatic tuning search for the next station that can be received in the selected direction If the or P button is pressed for longer the rapid search is started When the button is released the tuner will stop on the next station that can be received 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Manual Tuning This is used to manually search for stations in the preselected band Select the desired frequency band and then press briefly and repeatedly the A or V button to start the search in the desired direction If the A or V button is pressed longer the fast search starts and then stops when the button is released Stereophonic Broadcasters If the incoming signal is weak the reproduction is automatically switched from Stereo to Mono SiriusXM Satellite Radio If Equipped Satellite Radio Antenna If Equipped The antenna for the satellite radio is mounted on the roof of the vehicle Do not place items on the roof around the roof top antenna location Objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items should be placed as far from the antenna as possible Do not place items directly on or above the antenna SiriusXM Satelli
155. e use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor mance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you HEEEE I iTARTING AND OPERATING 283 Carbon Monoxide Warnings ADDING FUEL WARNING Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located on the passenger side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main tenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions
156. ea pese EN SIE SU eis Key aa SS agin aia ch eth Cad ah E ee a Ignition Key Removal llle Immobilizer Sentry Key 402 INDEX IN Infant Restraint llle 54 Information Center Vehicle 152 Instrument Cluster 0 0000000 ee eee 141 Instrument Panel and Controls 139 Instrument Panel Cover o o ooo o o oooo oo 363 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 363 Interior Appearance Care ooooooooooo ooo 361 Interior Lighting 660002004 tnn 110 Introduction 4 x sis wae y ada a Se Aes A 4 Jacking Instructions oooooooooooooooo o 307 Jack Location llle 303 Jack Operation ed verse Rer cR bere RES 302 Jump Starting 2 2 eae 313 Key In Reminder llle 13 Key Replacement vis dnm nete mh s 14 Keys caudam ba a CER ed ey Ced e 11 Key Sentry Immobilizer o ooooooooo 13 Lane Change and Turn SignalS 142 Lane Change Assist tea no narei rea ion 110 Lap Shoulder BeltS ooooooomo momo 27 Latches x 80 Hood sese e ease Re Uer nem dines 106 Lead Free Gasoline aed Reach RR es 279 Leaks Elda 2d 4 RESO dida 80 Lite ot Mires sie voee setas o 269 Liftgate Sedan 4 doe tace e tno Re yal alates 23 Light Bulbs sos sse ra rg 80 Lights ee edu oque ve dI euer boone herede 80 Aubag i s a ESO na ed 44 ANUCLOCK ace tenido E a 149 Brake Assist Warning llle 249 Brake Warnin
157. ecialists to ac quaint you with specific FIAT Group Automobiles ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capa bilities and safety tips e Call toll free at 1 800 890 4038 U S 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or e Visit us on the Worldwide Web at www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades 392 Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop
158. ed an audible alert is activated The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle The pauses between the tones are directly proportional to the dis tance from the obstacle Pulses emitted in quick succes sion indicate the presence of a very close obstacle A continuous tone indicates that the obstacle is less than 12 in 30 cm away Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Rear Park Assist System SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION Obstacle Distance An obstacle is present within the sensors field of view Audible signal dashboard loudspeaker e Sound pulses emitted at a rate that increases as the distance decreases Emits continuous tone at 12 in 30 cm e Adjustable volume level Refer to Menu Functions for further information Failure Sensor or System failures Visual Signal instrument panel con appears on display Message is displayed on multifunction display where provided 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IN While audible signals are emitted the audio system is not muted The audible signal is cut out immediately if the distance increases The tone cycle remains constant if the distance measured by the inner sensors is constant If this condi tion occurs for the external sensors the signal is cut off after 3 seconds stopping warnings during maneuvers parallel to walls Failure Indications A malfu
159. ed in the ESC system If this light remains on see your authorized studio as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be on even if it was turned off previously 23 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light es This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds 150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized studio 24 Door Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that one or more doors or the trunk may be ajar 25 Temperature Gauge The temperature digital scale shows engine coolant tem perature Any reading within the normal range indicate
160. ehicle in violation of the above re quirements can cause severe transmission damage Damage from improper towing is not covered un der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Manual Transmission e Vehicle can be flat towed all four wheels on the ground with the transmission in NEUTRAL e Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated e Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck all wheels off the ground CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require ments can cause severe transmission damage Dam age from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 323 e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed Unlock the doors automatically After the event occurs when the system is active the message Fuel Cutoff See Handbook is displayed Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engi
161. ehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a Continued service center where it can be raised on a lift WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Continued 308 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN WARNING Continued Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change e If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic e To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground es am AP Jack Warning Label NOTE Refer to the Compact Spare Tire section of the Tires General Information under Starting And Oper ating for information about the spare tire it s use and operation CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle 1 Remove the scissors jack and tool bag from under the driver s seat 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel bolts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground NOTE There are front and rear jacking locations on each side of the body as indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on t
162. ehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON RUN position A child could operate power windows other con trols or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is incorporated into the door handle Push or pull the handle to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate If the door handle is pushed a red lock indicator will show on the door handle indicating locked when the door is closed the door will lock NOTE To prevent the key from being locked in the vehicle the power door lock switch will not operate when the key is in the ignition and either front door is open A chime will sound as a reminder to remove the key Driver Power Door Lock Handle Autoclose If Equipped When enabled the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h To change the current setting refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information THINGS TO KNO
163. elt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor ALR feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual e Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in th
164. elt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision Continued THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 WARNING e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt may not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized studio immedi ately and have it fixed j bu Positioning Lap Belt 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retrac tor will withdraw any slack in the belt 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE HI 6 To release the belt push the red but
165. emove the two guard caps and the two fastening place it screws 6 Close the back cap locking it properly 2 Remove the center high mounted stop lamp assembly 7 Reinstall the two fastening screws and reinstall the 3 Disconnect the electric connector guand caps 4 Press the retaining device and open the bulb holder 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 10 5 Gallons 40 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 1 4L 1 4L Turbo Engine 4 Quarts 3 8 Liters Cooling System 1 4 Liter Engine MOPAR 4 6 Quarts 4 4 Liters Antifreeze Engine Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula with Manual Transmission 1 4 Liter Engine MOPAR 5 8 Quarts 5 5 Liters Antifreeze Engine Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula with Automatic Transmission n X MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant 1 4L 1 4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology Engine Oil 1 4L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W 30 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil 1 4L Turbo Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 40 Full Synthetic Engi
166. ended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission only the approved lubricant should be used Aa MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357 CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder and will require more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fluid specifications Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Fluid Level Check The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions Routine fluid level checks are not required therefore the transmission has no dipstick Your authorized studio can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools If you
167. equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF LOCK position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized studio es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149 The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 21 Electronic Stability Control OFF ESC OFF Indi cator Light ESC This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con OFF trol system ESC has been turned off by the driver 22 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator ESC Light in the instrument cluster will come on for four seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on con tinuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detect
168. er s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized studio name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage FIAT Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 888 242 6342 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY 388 Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contr
169. ervals The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed The suggested rotation method is the rearward cross shown in the following diagram This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed E ES a Y gt 8 055707139 Tire Rotation STARTING AND OPERATING 273 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold tire pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will 274 STARTING AND OPERATING HN also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pres
170. es side impact sensors that are cali brated to deploy the Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB VENIN GCO e Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your and SABIC during impacts that require air bag occupant protection vehicle Do not add roof racks that require perma nent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason WARNING e Your vehicle is equipped with left and right SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the side curtain air bag is located Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag should remain free from any obstructions The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects enhanced protection and works together with the Driver between you and the SAB the performance could Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Knee Impact Bolster i The Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of the Continued front passenger and position the front occupant for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Air Bags
171. ess the clutch pedal before starting the vehicle This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlock ing ignition system It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor Automatic Transmission If Equipped The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes before shifting to any driving gear NOTE You must press the brake pedal before shifting out of PARK Normal Starting NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal 218 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Turn the ignition switch to the AVV START position and release it when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the ignition switch to the STOP OFF LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Cold Weather Operation To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low temperatures this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking when the ambient temperature is less than 22 F 30 C and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine block heater has not been used An externally powered electric engine block heater is available as optional equipment or from your authorized studio The message plug in engine heater will be displayed in the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is below 5 F 15 C at the time the engine is shut off
172. fly press the SET ESC button to go back to the sub menu screen or press and hold the SET ESC button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings Language Selecting The Language The messages can be displayed in the following lan guages Italian English German Portuguese Spanish French Dutch Polish UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 To set the required language proceed as follows 1 Briefly press the SET ESC button The previously set language will flash on the display 2 Press the UP A or DOWN V button for setting 3 Briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the menu screen or press and hold the SET ESC button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings Buzzer Volume Adjusting The Failure Warning Buzzer Volume With this function the volume of the buzzer accompany ing any failure warning indication can be adjusted to one of eight volume levels 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE To adjust the volume proceed as follows 1 Briefly press the SET ESC button The previously set volume level will flash on the display 2 Press the UP Aor DOWN V button for setting 3 Briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the menu screen or press and hold the SET ESC button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings Button Volume Button Volume Adjustment
173. function Indicator Light 146 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 75 Checks Safety docta esee e yate dae gt 75 Child Resttaint css et tue Rte Hae 54 Clean Air Gasoline llle 280 308 INDEX IN Cleaning Wheels eR cenae Renee RO Reemi Sete cs 360 Windshield Wiper Blades 342 Climate Control s ccn ERR bus DR ace 200 Cl tchi i4 eiue x GU eque E b OR n 353 Clutch Elida Rede ia eae e 353 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 199 Compact Spare Tire 2 0 0 0 266 Connector UCI sede ecan tebg iena Eyes r owas re 197 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 197 Contract Service s s 6403 8400 b edes 388 Convertible Top Maintenance o o 364 Coolant Antifreeze leeren 376 Cooling System llle o 348 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 349 Coolant evel i24 RR Res Rs 348 Disposal of Used Coolant 351 Drain Flush and Refill 348 Inspection iess 3 ce Cie a aem aes 351 Points to Remember less 350 Pressure Cap ocn iaa ara E RR d 350 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 349 Corrosion Protection 0 0 cee eee 358 Crise Light iade dne Vel es earned Ea debes 143 Cupholders eies beg RE ER REA 131 Customer Assistance 0 0 0 0 cee eee 386 Data Recorder Event 0 00000 cee eee 53 Daytime Running Lights 109 Defroster Windshield
174. g u soera gag inpet ee eee 148 Bulb Replacement 0 005 372 Engine Temperature Warning 147 EXtQHOD aha asi aeta A 80 FOS ciere Rog S rro RE Rod diag n dn Samia 142 A INDEX 403 High Beam iua fiend Seon e Rem es 108 High Beam Indicator ooooooooooooo 142 LOW Fuel sp fect tag c dme Rete hA 142 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 146 Oil Pressure cul RE a eei 146 Paik ME C S 109 Passing ca iii hes Rb Ren setae Re 108 Seat Belt Reminder less 143 vas MMC 372 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 146 Tire Pressure Monitoring IPMS 144 Traction Control o oooooooooooooo o 249 T ri Signal ei rai s ewe pate eso 80 Voltage ums eve diss e pas visse edes us 143 Wait to Start occ acan ee o e rr RR 14 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 141 Loading Vehicle jS 256 Locks Automatic Door llle 21 DOOr 4222 43 x26 md 3 RIP EER 19 Power Doof uunc EROR RO RS E 20 Lubrication Body s cec ee RE 342 Maintenance Free Battery oooo oooo oo o 337 Maintenance General 332 Maintenance Procedures ooo oo 332 Maintenance Schedule illl 380 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 146 Manual Service ooo o o 390 Manual Transmission 220 Fluid Level Check o oo oooooo 356 Frequency of Fluid Change
175. ghts To turn on the parking lights remove the key p 02 or turn the ignition to OFF LOCK position and turn on the headlights Daytime Running Lights If Equipped To activate the Daytime Running Lights DRL rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the O symbol NOTE The low beams and side taillights will not be on with DRL The DRL function can be turned on or off using the display menus Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Turn Signals Push the multifunction lever upward to signal a right turn or downward to signal a left turn The correspond ing indicator in the instrument cluster will blink to indicate the operation of the turn signal Turn Signal Operation 031410254 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME NOTE The indicators will automatically turn off when the turn has been completed and the steering wheel is returned to a straight position Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off Follow Me Home Headlight Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for a preset period of time Activation Remove the key or turn the ignition to the OFF LOCK position and pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel within
176. gy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recom mended viscosity and quality grades refer to Mainte nance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle Never use Non Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result NOTE A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM WARNING Exhaust Gas E WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode e If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force ou
177. han 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other e Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Continued 338 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion e If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables be fore connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized studio at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be che
178. he flash if pressed This indicates that you can not proceed system to function automatically to this mode due to fogging risk When the Auto indicator is on and the Recirculation indicator is off the Recirculation is in AUTO mode If the Recirculation indicator is on the Recirculation setting is manual and Recirculation is on es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 NOTE e tis not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric units by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in this section of the manual To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up The blower will increase in speed and transition into AUTO mode Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features NOTE Each of these features operates independently from each other If any feature is controlled manually temperature control will continue to operate automati cally Blower Control NS 0000111 There are 12 fixed blower speeds Use the blower control up or down buttons to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any m
179. he operation the source does not change and the previous situation will be displayed Radio Tuner Introduction When the car radio is turned on the last function that was selected before turning it off Radio CD CD MP3 AUX is activated To select the Radio function when another audio source is being listened to briefly press the TUNER button Once the Radio mode has been activated the display will show the name RBDS stations only or the frequency of the selected radio station the frequency band selected e g FMA and the preset button number e g P1 A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 Frequency Band Selection With the Radio mode active press the FM or AM tuner button briefly and repeatedly to select the desired recep tion band Each time the button is pressed the following bands are selected cyclically e AM FM or SAT if equipped Each band is highlighted by the corresponding wordings on the display The radio will be tuned to last station selected on the respective frequency band Preset Buttons The buttons numbered from 1 to 5 are used to set the following pre selections e 15 in the FM band 5 in FMA 5 in FMB 5 in FMC e 10 in the AM band 5 in AMA 5 in AMB 15 in SAT if so equipped 5 SATA 5 SATB 5 SATC To listen to a preset station select the desired frequency band and then briefly press the corresponding preset button from 1 to 5 By pressing the preset button for mor
180. he presence of mountains buildings or bridges or when you are far The radio has been designed according to the specifica away from the broadcaster tions of the passenger compartment with a personalized design to match the style of the dashboard 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE WARNING Having the volume turned up high can cause the driver to not be able to hear important traffic sounds i e sirens horns etc This could cause an accident Always adjust the volume so that you can still hear background noises Care And Maintenance Clean the cover with a soft antistatic cloth only Cleaning and polishing products could damage the surface CDs The presence of dirt scratches or distortions on the CDs could cause skipping and poor sound quality while it is playing For optimal playback conditions follow these guidelines e Only use branded CDs Clean every CD thoroughly removing any finger marks or dust using a soft cloth Hold CDs by the outside and clean them from the middle outwards Never use chemicals e g antistatics or thinners or sprays for cleaning as they could damage the surface of the CDs After listening to them place CDs back in their boxes to prevent them from being damaged Do not expose CDs to direct sunlight high tempera tures or moisture for long periods Do not stick labels on the CD surface or write on the recorded surface with pencils or pens Do not use CDs that are
181. he sill molding WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 309 060535916 060535917 mm Front Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged 310 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN 3 Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be WARNING placed under the jacking location Once the jack is positioned turn the jack screw to the right until the Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and to the wheel to be changed hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 4 Using the swivel wrench raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability 5 Remove the wheel bolts and pull the wheel off the hub For vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels the center caps must be removed to remove the wheel 060535918 bolts Jack Location a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 311 WARNING NOTE The wheel cover is held on the wheel by the wheel bolts When reinstalling the original wheel prop To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack erly align the wheel cover to the valve stem place the do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle wheel cover onto
182. he vehicle is on a jack The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Continued mmE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 303 Jack Location Spare Tire Removal The jack and jack wrench tool are stowed in a bag under The spare tire is stowed to the underbody below the the front driver s seat cargo area 1 Remove the plug located in the rear cargo area 060535908 Jack And Jack Handle Location 060535912 Winch Access Plug 304 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN 2 Fit the wrench tool over the drive nut Use the wrench CAUTION to rotate the nut counterclockwise until the spare is on the ground with enough slack in the cable to allow you The winch mechanism is designed for use with the to pull the tire out from under the vehicle jack wrench tool only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and they can dam age the winch 3 Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle 060535914 Lowering Raising Spare Tire WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 305 4 When the spare is clear remove the knob or plastic mol
183. heck and adjust hand brake e Rotate the tires Rotate at the first sign of irregu lar wear even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on e Inspect exhaust system e Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off road conditions e Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required e Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped with dipstick M A l N T E N A N e E S e H E D U L E S 8 IN 382 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MH A A W Maintenance Chart Bl Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals T amp Pag q E Mileage or time passed o a oa ea e ea e e Sg S2 S8 8 8 8 N whichever comes firs 31 8181818 835 8 8 cilelo sis sS A 3182 18 18 R9 lSjej zaj 9s C Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 E Or Kilometers ele sisis isssi s 288 888 8 38 8 8 8 8 8 8 e S S S S S EJ I EEES 8 RIS E Additional Inspections fy Inspect the CV joints X X X U H L Inspect front suspension tie rod ends and X X X X X X E boot seals and replace if necessary Ss Inspect the brake linings parking brake X X X X X X X 8 function Additional Maintenance Replace engine air filter X X X X X Replace cabin air filter X X X X X X X a MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 383 Lj A Mileage or time passed o
184. hich could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others When you are in a severe braking condition involving the use of the ABS you will experience some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a stop This is the result of the system reverting to the base brake system Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a pulsing sensation You may also hear a clicking noise These occurrences are normal and indicate that the system is functioning properly ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with a advanced electronic brake control system that includes the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Brake Assist System BAS Traction Con trol System TCS Hill Start Assist HSA and Electronic Stability Control ESC All systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC 244 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System in Start ing and Operating for further information Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing
185. hose off the undercarriage at least once a month If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider e Tt is important that the drain holes in the lower edges ud or stone shields behind each wheel of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as open possible Your authorized studio has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is Wheel And Wheel Trim Care considered the responsibility of the owner All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and e If your vehicle is damaged due toa collision Or similar chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly cause that destroys the paint and protective coating with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use hecoumner MOPAR Wheel Cleaner a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361 CAUTION For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue or metal polishes Do not use oven cleaner These products may damage the wheel s protective finish e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi
186. i credene brat iia x4 RC 220 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 17 Transporting Pets 6 6 eee eee eee 74 Tread Wear Indicators 000000 c eee 268 Trip Odometer 6 6 ee 151 Turn Signals se cg gi La Sede ea 109 UCI Connectot arae rey Cad eee 197 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 391 a INDEX 409 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 197 Unleaded Gasoline o o o oooo ooo ooo 279 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 32 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 7 Vehicle Loading r ss ddira kn er RR 257 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 Vehicle Storage mosca ema Ee 211 Wait to Start Light 00 141 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 141 Warnings and Cautions 0006 7 Warranty Information llle 4 Washer Adding Fluid nae uere pen nes ale eta 345 Washers Windshield ooo 112 Washing Vehicle s eba iia hie St wea ina aa 359 Water Driving Through 5 ase uere diarias da 234 Wheel and Wheel Trim o oo o oo 360 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 360 Wind Butte iru ra a al 23 Window Fogging 0 6 6 0 oserye ieiti 210 WindOWSu i es a Gd eae a ed base 21 Pow t gave eek ea eee dada ed eee ae ea 21 Windshield Defroster o oo o 78 Windshield Washers 0000 eee aes 112 Windshield Wiper Blades
187. ill not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any or all of the following may occur The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for air bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the air They are not permanent and normally heal quickly bags will not be in place to protect you a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 WARNING Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING
188. in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a side impact The SAB are marked with an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB Label a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 When the air bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each air bag deploys independently a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right side impact deploys the right air bag only Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC may offer side impact protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The SABIC deploy downward covering both windows on the impact side R 022635856 Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Label Location NOTE Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In The system includ
189. in the AUDIO menu 3 Press the 4 button to increase the sound from the left speakers or the button to increase the sound from the right speakers By pressing the 4 or amp buttons briefly the levels will change progressively By pressing them down longer the levels will change quickly Select the value 0 to set the right and left audio outputs at the same level Fader Adjustment Proceed as follows 1 Press AUDIO button 2 Press the A or V button to set Fader in the AUDIO menu 3 Press the 4 button to increase the sound coming from the rear speakers or the B button to increase the sound coming from the front speakers By pressing the or amp buttons briefly the levels will change progressively By pressing them down longer the levels will change quickly Select the value 0 to set the right and left audio outputs at the same level Loudness Function If Equipped The Loudness function improves the volume of the sound while listening at low volumes increasing the bass and treble To activate deactivate this function select the Loudness setting in the AUDIO menu The condition of the function on or off is shown on the display for a few seconds by the wording Loudness On or Loudness Off A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 Preset User Classic Rock Jazz Functions If Equipped The built in equalizer can be activated deactivated When the equalizer f
190. ine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom mended a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 337 Maintenance Free Battery WARNING Continued Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean e Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater t
191. ing a seat belt properly 030935938 Adjusting Bar While sitting in the seat lift up on the bar and move the seat forward or rearward Release the bar once the desired position is reached Then using body pressure 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Recline Adjustment The recline adjustment lever is located on the inboard side of the seat To recline the seatback lift up the recline lever lean back until the desired position has been reached and release the lever Recline Lever WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Seat Height Adjustment EZ Entry Feature The driver s seat height can be raised or lowered by The driver and front passenger seats have an EZ entry using a lever located on the outboard side of the seat feature for rear seat pas
192. io will then tune to first station in that program type Pressing lt or gt gt buttons will tune to only the stations in that program type Pressing the A or V buttons until All is displayed will allow normal tuning to all stations The Program Types available are All Pop Rock Electronic Dance Hip Hop R amp B Country Christian Jazz Standards Classical Latin World Sports Enter tainment Talk News NPR Comedy Family amp Health Religion Traffic Weather You can find the SirtusXM current terms and condi tions at http www sirius com Re Subscribe To SiriusXM Satellite Radio New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with their radio Following expiration of the free services it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen in order to re subscribe Press the UP DOWN button to scroll through the Menu Functions and the Left Right button to change the selected Set up Menu function 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Write down the Electronic Serial Number ESN for your receiver To retrieve the Electronic Serial Number of SiriusXM Satellite Receiver Module tune to Channel 0 Make sure that when the order is placed the ESN are correct If any of the ESN numbers are not entered correctly then the SiriusXM subscription will not be able to be transferred to the new radio and will not be ac
193. ion pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145 vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuousl
194. is an easy and convenient way to use BLUE amp ME All the system functions are available within the BLUE amp ME Main Menu When the car is not moving you can scroll through the complete menu by using either the buttons on the steering wheel or the voice commands When you are travelling you can interact with BLUE amp ME by using the buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands relevant only to phone functions LAST CALLS and PHONEBOOK and the media player To activate settings when travelling you can only use voice commands The hands free kit enables the following operations Contact Calling By Voice you can call a contact in your mobile phone phonebook using your voice You can also call a contact in your phonebook by scanning through the entries on the multifunction display To use this option you have to transfer your mobile phone contacts to the hands free kit phonebook Digit Dialing By Voice you can dial a phone number by pressing the VR button on the steering wheel and speaking the digits to be dialed To Call The SMS Text Sender call directly the last SMS text sender or the sender of a message received and stored in the BLUE amp ME inbox ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 To Answer A Call you can answer an incoming call by pressing the MENU Phone button on the steering wheel Conference Call you can call another contact while you are engaged in a phone conve
195. is inflated Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions Cut off fuel to the engine Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed Unlock the doors automatically 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM After the event occurs when the system is active the message Fuel Cutoff See Handbook is displayed Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine com partment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine System Reset Procedure After an impact causing air bag deployment the left and right turn signal lights located in the instrument panel cluster will both be blinking until the ignition is turned
196. ision or AutoStick is engaged personal injury e If the system detects powertrain overheating the transmission will revert to a automatic shift mode and DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off Acceleration If the system detects a problem it will disable Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip AutoStick mode and the transmission will return to pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull automatic mode until the problem is corrected erratically to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels 234 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precautions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace the tires when t
197. it someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is has come to a complete stop and the engine is at firmly pressing the brake pedal idle speed e Do not shift between PARK REVERSE NEUTRAL or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued NOTE You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK 224 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Continued WARNING Continued Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure seriously or fatally injured Children should be those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is or the shift lever running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFF and remove the ignition key Once the key is removed the shift lever is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement e When leaving the vehicle always remove the igni Key Ignition Park Interlock tion key and lock your vehicle This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to before the ignition switch can be turned to the OFF
198. ition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 Manual Heating And Air Conditioning 1 Temperature Control Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment Rotating the dial to the left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating to the right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures 2 Blower Control m Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the 0 OFF position There are four blower speeds 045670103 3 Recirculation Control Manual Temperature Control MTC The Manual Climate controls consist of a series of rotary culation mode and outside air mode Recirculation can be dials and one inner push knob used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Rotate this control to change the system between recir 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE Con
199. k the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 OAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353 Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the WEENING condenser clean Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage Riding the brakes may also reduce braking capacity in an emergency Brake Master Cylinder Brake System The fluid level in the master cylinder
200. l cause oil aeration which can fully warmed engine is shut off Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick The safe range is indicated by a crosshatch zone Adding 1 qt 1L of oil when the reading is at the low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator range lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature This loss of oil pressure and increased oil temperature could damage your engine Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for further informa tion NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km or twelve months whichever occurs first 334 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institu
201. l go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to the appropriate Blue amp Me User s Manual for further information CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do notstore the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This cond
202. ld lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap e If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap Transporting Pets 022640297 Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly 4 Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child injured or could injure a passenger during panic braking restraint manufacturer s instructions or in a collision Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 CAUTION ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality ener
203. lends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms operate in a lean mode A STARTING AND OPERATING 281 e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following drain the fuel tank see your authorized studio change the engine oil and oil filter disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life a
204. lowing an event that causes switching from day to night conditions or vice versa in the passenger compartment e g in a tunnel on avenues in shadows under bridges etc To adjust the brightness proceed as follows 1 Press the UP Aor DOWN V button to set the required brightness level A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161 2 Briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the menu screen or press and hold the SET ESC approxi mately one second to go back to the main screen without storing settings Speed Beep Speed Limit With this function it is possible to set the car speed limit mph or km h when this limit is exceeded the driver is immediately alerted To set the speed limit proceed as follows 1 Briefly press the SET ESC button The display will show the message Speed Beep 2 Press the UP AA or DOWN V button to select speed limit activation On or deactivation Off 3 When the function is activated On briefly press the SET ESC button to display the presently set activation speed Pressing the UP Aor DOWN V buttons selects the speed limit Press SET ESC to confirm selection NOTE Selection is possible between 20 and 125 mph or km h depending on the selected unit The setting will increase decrease by five units each time the UP DOWN button is pressed Press and hold the UP DOWN button to increase decrease the setting rapidly Save the setting by briefly pressing the button when you
205. ls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Master card American Express and Discover orders are accepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor mation that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintain ing servicing and repairing FIAT Group Automobiles vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 391 problems the first time using step by step troubleshoot ing and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering sp
206. luid replacement during the life of the vehicle If the impair its performance The proper type of brake brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the not indicate any leaks or other problems it may be a original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system See reservoir your local authorized studio for service Continued a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355 WARNING Continued To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro longed braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Continued WARNING Continued Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision CAUTION Use of improper brake fluids will
207. m can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose improperly installed or damaged If the system detects a malfunction the gASCAP message will display in the odometer display Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off TRAILER TOWING Trailer towing with this vehicle is not allowed 286 STARTING AND OPERATING HN RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission Flat Tow NONE Transmission in NOT ALLOWED NEUTRAL Dolly Tow Front OK OK Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED On Trailer ALL OK OK NOTE Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may be recreationally towed flat towed at any legal highway speed for any distance if the manual transmis sion is in NEUTRAL CAUTION DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission Damage to the drivetrain will result If these vehicles require towing make sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground A STARTING AND OPERATING 287 NOTE
208. m the child restraint Repeat steps 4 to 6 above to complete the installation of the child restraint If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the buckle disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around one half turn and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still cannot make the child restraint installation tight try a different seating position Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage 1 Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position see the charts above move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available 2 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints raise the head restraint and where possible route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts If not possible lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE HI 3 Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to WARNING the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram An incorrectly anchored tether strap cou
209. mance 270 STARTING AND OPERATING HN when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling If you ever replace a wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels It is recommended you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle WARNING Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious i
210. move the bulb and replace as needed 1 Turn the steering wheel completely to the left or right neil the bulb into sodet and roate bulb sad s 2 Open the wheel housing access door clockwise into lamp locking it in place 7 Reinstall the plastic cap Front Fog Lamps To replace the front fog lights see your authorized studio Front Rear Side Marker Lamps 1 Remove portion of the wheel liner to allow hand 7 access to side marker lamp 2 Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove ae the bulb and socket assembly from the housing 3 Remove the plastic cap from the back of the lamp housing 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Pull the bulb from the socket and insert the replace ment bulb 4 Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place 5 Reinstall the wheel liner Rear Tail Stop Backup And Turn Signal Lamps 1 Open the liftgate 2 Remove the two screws and remove the tail lamp assembly 073310795 Remove the four screws using a T20 driver and separate the backplate from the lamp housing Remove the tail stop or turn signal bulbs by pushing them slightly and turning counter clockwise Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight out Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL 5 Remove the snap fitted bulb to be replaced and re 1 R
211. mproper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear pat terns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredict able steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated A STARTING AND OPERATING 263 CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Infl
212. n STARTING AND OPERATING 247 ESC Off Switch Automatic Transmission ESC Off Switch Manual Transmission NOTE The ESC Off switch is located left of the steering column Manual Transmission Only 248 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent acci dents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ESC Operating Modes The ESC system has two available operating modes Full On This is the normal operating mode for ESC Whenever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in On mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESC should only be turned to Partial Off for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESC on again momentarily press the switch again This
213. n 4 to turn off the TIREFIT kit Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the Sealant Bottle 1 and place the sticker on the instru ment panel Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose 6 from the valve stem reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the hose and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle storage location Quickly proceed to D Drive Vehicle CAUTION The metal end fitting from Power Plug 8 may get hot after use so it should be handled carefully e Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 can result in sealant con tacting your skin clothing and the vehicle s inte rior It can also result in sealant contacting internal TIREFIT kit components which may cause perma nent damage to the kit D Drive Vehicle Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire drive the vehicle 5 miles 8 km or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire Do not exceed 55 mph 88 km h 300 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN WARNING 3 Uncoil the Air Pump Hose 7 black in color and screw the fitting at the end of hose 7 onto the valve TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair Have the stem fire inspected and repaired or replaced after using 4 Chege the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure Gauge 3 TIREFIT Do not exceed 55 mph 88 km h until the tire is repaired or replaced Failure to follow this w
214. n adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window LIFTGATE To unlock the liftgate use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or activate the power door lock switches located on the front door handles To open the liftgate squeeze the liftgate release handle and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion 022235849 Liftgate Handle 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II WARNING OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous vehicle are the restraint systems exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep Three point lap and shoulder belts for all seating the liftgate closed when you are operating the positions vehicle Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front e If you are required to drive with the liftgate open passenger make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Do not use the recirculation mode Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window Gas props support the liftgate in the open position However because the gas pressure drops with tempera e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgat
215. n a fuel economy upshift light in the instrument cluster for optimum fuel economy when operating in base driving mode Fuel Econ Off the fuel economy upshift light is disabled To set the required unit proceed as follows 1 Briefly press the SET ESC button to display the two sub menus UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 2 Press the UP A or DOWN V button to navigate the two sub menus 3 Select the required sub menu and then briefly press the SET ESC button 4 Press the UP A or DOWN V button for setting 5 Briefly press the SET ESC button to return to the sub menu When you have made the required settings briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the sub menu screen or press and hold the SET ESC button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings Hill Start Assist This function is used when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill Hill Start Assist maintains the same level of 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the foot has been removed from the brake pedal Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off 1 Briefly press the SET ESC button On or Off will flash on the display according to previous setting 2 Press the UP Aor DOWN V button for setting 3 Briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the menu screen or press and hold the button approxi ma
216. n infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate or both Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR retractor can be switched into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor If it is locked the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to the Automatic Locking Mode description un der Occupant Restraints The cinching latch plate is designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a child restraint s belt path Please see the table below and the following sections for more information about both types of seat belts Lap Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child Restraints in this Vehicle 022669375 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child re straint for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint Weight limit of the Child
217. n vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN This PIN is required for authorized studio replacement of keys Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized studio This procedure consists of program ming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one which has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized studio a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF
218. nction of the Rear Park Assist sensors or system is indicated during REVERSE gear engagement by the instrument panel warning icon The warning icon is illuminated and a message is displayed on the multifunction display if equipped Refer to Instrument Cluster Descriptions in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the ignition is in the ON RUN position Failures are indi cated immediately if they occur when the system is ON Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor is in failure condition the instrument cluster display shall indicate that the Rear Park Assist system is unavail able without reference to the sensor in failure condition If even a single sensor fails the entire system must be disabled The system is turned off automatically Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths In washing stations clean sensors quickly keeping the vapor jet high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 in 10 cm from the sensors Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could damage the sensors a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Park Assist System Usage Precautions NOTE e Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the rear bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction
219. nd reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor nia reformulated gasoline 282 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system Continued CAUTION Continued An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser vice Contact your authorized studio for service assistance Th
220. ndow defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information 030436592 Spotter Mirror a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 Sun Visors The driver and passenger sun visors are located on the headliner near the front windshield The sun visor can be rotated downward or up against the door glass Both sun visors are equipped with courtesy mirrors 030436593 Sun Visor Passenger Side Shown BLUE amp ME HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION IF EQUIPPED Overview Windows Mobile based FIAT BLUE amp ME is a per sonal telematic system enabling you to use communica tion and entertainment applications expressly designed for use in the car The BLUE amp ME system installed on your car is equipped with a hands free kit message reader and media player and it is preset for future installation of additional services The BLUE amp ME system fully integrated with voice commands buttons on the steering wheel and multifunc tion display messages gives you the possibility of inter acting with your Bluetooth wireless technology mobile phone even if you keep it in your pocket or bag without having to take your eyes off the road or remove your hands from the steering wheel To use voice commands 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II you are not required to train the voice recognition system to recognize your voice This implies tha
221. ne Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 10896 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter 1 4L 1 4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filter Spark Plugs 1 4L 1 4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Gap 0 026in 65 mm Fuel Selection 1 4L 1 4L Turbo Engine 87 Octane Acceptable 91 Octane Recommended 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Manual Transmission If Equipped We recommend you use MOPAR C635 DDCT MTX Transmission Fluid Automatic Transmission If Equipped We recommend you use MOPAR AW 1 Transmission Fluid Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS B MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 380 Maintenance Chart 382 M A N T E N A N e E S e H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N ie E S Cc H E D U L E S 8 380 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES HN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Based on engine operation conditions the
222. ne com partment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine System Reset Procedure After an impact causing airbag deployment the left and right turn signal lights located in the instrument panel cluster will both be blinking until the ignition is turned off 324 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road you Customer Action Customer Will See must follow the system reset procedure Tum Left Turn Left Turn Light is ON Signal Switch ON SOLID Right Turn Light Customer Action Customer Will See sae is on SCIHID 6 y e er 2 7 Turn Left Turn Left Turn Light is OFF e M endi Signal Switch OFF Right Turn Light is OFF ii P Sir S Turn Signal Switch conse Must be placed in 2 Turn ignition ON Left Turn Light is OFF Neutral State O O Z Bight Tuni Light BLINKS 8 Turn ignition OFF System is now reset and the 3 Turn Right Turn Right Turn Light is ON Signal Switch ON SOLID Left Tarn Light ES A AS Turn Hazard PE Flashers OFF 4 Turn Left Turn Left Turn Light is ON Manually Signal Switch ON SOLID Right Turn Light BLINKS If a reset procedure step is not completed within 45 sec 5 Turn Right Turn Right Turn Light is ON onds then the turn signal lights will turn off and the reset Signal Switch ON SOLID Left Turn Light procedure must be performed again in order to be BLINKS successful
223. necting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized studio service the air bag system immediately trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized studio Only manufacturer approved e The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is modify the air bag system for persons with dis first turned to the ON RUN position abilities contact your authorized studio The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the Body Control Module BCM fuse block inside the vehicle for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag fuses See your authorized studio if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The
224. nit in three submenus Distance Temperature and Fuel Economy To set the required unit proceed as follows 1 Briefly press the SET ESC button to display the three sub menus 2 Press the UP Aor DOWN V button to navigate the three sub menus 3 Select the required sub menu and then briefly press the SET ESC button 4 When accessing the Distance submenu briefly press the SET ESC button Either mi or km will appear on the display according to the previous setting 5 Press the UP AA or DOWN V button for setting 6 Briefly press the SET ESC button to return to the sub menu 7 When accessing the Fuel Economy submenu briefly press the SET ESC button Either mpg km l or 100km will appear on the display according to the previous setting If the distance unit set is mi the fuel economy unit will be displayed in mpg If the distance unit set is km the fuel economy unit will be displayed in either km l or 1 100km 1 Press the UP Aor DOWN V button for setting 2 Briefly press the SET ESC button to return to the sub menu 3 When accessing the Temperature submenu briefly press the SET ESC button Either F or C will appear on the display according to the previous setting 4 Press the UP A or DOWN V button for setting 5 Briefly press the SET ESC button to return to the sub menu When you have made the required settings brie
225. njury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have a collision Continued A STARTING AND OPERATING 271 WARNING Continued CAUTION e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire following precautions failure and loss of vehicle control Use Security Chain Company SCC SCC Z6 low profile or equivalent chains on 185 55R15 tires only Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other suspension components it is important that only chains in good condition are used Broken chains can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the TIRE CHAINS chain before further use Use only compact chains or other traction aids that meet Do not exceed 45 mph 70 km h SAE type Class S specifications Chains must be the Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain bumps especially with a loaded vehicle manufacturer CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
226. now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the de signed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of parts which are not quality equivalent to genuine parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty STUDIO SERVICE Your authorized studio has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic 332 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the
227. nu functions To change the setting of the selected function use the lt or gt buttons The current status of the selected function appears on the display The functions managed by the Menu are e Speech Volume e Aux Audio Offset e Radio Off e Sat ID e SiriusXM Telephone Number e System Reset e Speed Volume On Volume Limit Press the MENU button again to exit the Menu function Speed Volume Function If Equipped This function automatically adapts the volume level to the speed of the car turning up the volume when the speed increases to maintain the ratio with the noise level inside the passenger compartment To activate deactivate the function use the buttons The wording Speed volume appears on the display followed by the current status of the function e Off function deactivated ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 Low function activated low sensitivity e High function activated high sensitivity On Volume Limit This function makes it possible to activate deactivate the maximum volume limit when turning the radio on The display shows the function status e On volume limit on when the radio is turned on the volume level will be If the volume level is equal to or higher than the maximum value the radio will come on at the maximum volume If the volume level is between the minimum and maximum values the radio will come on at the same volume as before it wa
228. nually When the Trip distance reaches 9999 9 miles or kilo meters or when the Travel time reaches 99 59 99 hours and 59 minutes the system is reset automatically e Disconnecting Reconnecting the battery resets the system NOTE If the reset operation occurs in the presence of the screens concerning Trip A or Trip B only the information associated with Trip A or Trip B functions will be reset Start Of Trip Procedure With the ignition on press and hold the TRIP button for over one second to reset Exit Trip To exit the Trip function wait until all the values have been displayed or hold the SET ESC button for longer than one second Briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the menu screen or press and hold the SET ESC approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing settings Trip Functions Both trip functions are resettable reset start of new trip Trip A can be used to display the figures relating to Trip distance A e Average consumption A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159 e Instant consumption A Values Displayed e Average speed A Range Travel time A driving time This indicates the distance which may be travelled with Trip B can be used to display the figures relating to the fuel remaining in the tank assuming that driving MN conditions will not change The message will Trip distance B appear on the display in the following case
229. o recirculate interior air by pressing the RECIRCULATION control button Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily The recirculation LED will illuminate when this button is selected Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE Automatic Temperature Controls ATC will au tomatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield When this occurs recirculation will be unavailable 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN Operating Tips Window Fogging Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it s rainy or humid In most cases turning the air conditioning pressing the A C button on will clear the fog Adjust the temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the Defrost mode Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non filming cleaning solution vinegar and water works very well will help prevent contaminates cigarette smoke perfumes etc from sticking to the windows Contaminates increase the rat
230. ode you select The blower speed increases as 045635943 you press or hold the blower control up button and decreases when you press or hold the blower control down button The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by pressing the blower control up or down buttons The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the AUTO mode The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the following positions Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets Floor Mode e x Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets Bi Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets Press and release the Panel mode button and Floor mode button to enter Bi Level mode the indicators illuminate when ON Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode Mix Mode Air comes from the floor
231. of control of the vehicle 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Lights Fluid Leaks Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or panel brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be D located and corrected immediately oor Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll POWER CONVERTIBLE TOP IF EQUIPPED 84 Heated Mirrors If Equipped Lowering The Power Top 84 Sun VISOES sec sedesie ed eh Rh dee Raising The Power Top 00 84 M BLUE amp ME HANDS FREE Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure 85 MVCN TION TE BOUIREEDD apiid a Wind Stop ees 86 Overview eem a X UE A 91 B MIRRORS eee 87 Pe ire eae ade dpi e Inside Day Night Mirror o o o 87 B SEAIS eoe be ae EEEO AN 99 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 87 O Front Seats Forward Rearward Adjustment 99 e EHE 88 Recline Adjustment 06 100 Folding Mirrors i eese 90 E n
232. of compatible mobile phones 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In Message reader functions are managed by the control buttons on the steering wheel or by the BLUE amp ME voice commands The BLUE amp ME message reader enables the following operations To display an indicator on the instrument panel that indicates you have received a new SMS text It will display the sender s number name and will ask you whether to read the text of the message to you To manage the list of SMS texts received on your BLUE amp ME paired mobile phone To read the messages received and stored Messages can be read multiple times To call the SMS text sender using the buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands e To delete individual messages or the entire inbox using the buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands The BLUE amp ME system can also recognize and read abbreviations if any e g ILUVU will be read like love you and interpret the most usual emoticons e g will be read like Smile that are currently used to write SMS texts Media Player With the BLUE amp ME media player you can play the digital audio files stored on a USB device by simply connecting it to the USB port located in the glove box of the car In this way while you are driving you can play your favorite music collections iPod Player see dedicated paragraph under Media Player Functions a UNDERST
233. of the retractor Then allow the webbing to retract N oo THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 back into the retractor As the webbing retracts you will hear a clicking sound This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor If it is locked you should not be able to pull out any web bing If the retractor is not locked repeat step 5 Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap Refer to Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil dren LATCH Restraint System for directions to attach a tether anchor 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME 9 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by 3 Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching Latch Plate CINCH If Equipped 1 Place the child seat in the center of the seating position For some second row sea
234. off In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road you must follow the system reset procedure Customer Action Customer Will See 1 Turn ignition OFF Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State 2 Turn ignition ON Left Turn Light is OFF Right Turn Light BLINKS 3 Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON Right Turn Light is ON SOLID Left Turn Light BLINKS 4 Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON Left Turn Light is ON SOLID Right Turn Light BLINKS a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 Customer Action Customer Will See 5 Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON Right Turn Light is ON SOLID Left Turn Light BLINKS 6 Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON Left Turn Light is ON SOLID Right Turn Light is ON SOLID 7 Turn Left Turn Signal Switch OFF Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State Left Turn Light is OFF Right Turn Light is OFF 8 Turn ignition OFF System is now reset and the engine may be started 9 Turn Hazard Flashers OFF Manually If a reset procedure step is not completed within 45 sec onds then the turn signal lights will turn off and the reset procedure must be performed again in order to be successful 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side air bags w
235. oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Operating conditions such as frequent short trips trailer tow extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures and E85 fuel usage will influence when the Change Oil or Oil Change Re quired message is displayed Severe Operating Condi tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3 500 miles 5 600 km since last reset Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change inter vals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km or twelve months whichever comes first Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip Check engine oil level Check windshield washer fluid level Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake master cylinder and transmission as needed Check function of all interior and exterior lights a MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 381 Required Maintenance Intervals At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following Oil Change Indicator System page for the required maintenance intervals e Inspect brake pads shoes rotors drums and hoses At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By e Inspect engine cooling system protection and Oil Change Indicator System h s s e Change oil and filter e C
236. omponents Occupant Restraint Controller ORC a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Air Bag Warning Light Advanced Front Air Bag Features e Steering Wheel and Column The Advanced Front Air Bag system provides output Inst i Panel appropriate to the severity and type of collision as MEM NIU determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC 2o Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag which may receive information from the front impact Knee Impact Bolster Sensors e Driver Advanced Front Air Bag WARNING Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag e e No objects should be placed over or near the air bag e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB on the instrument panel because any such objects e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate e Front and Side Impact Sensors Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch Continued and Seat Track Position Sensors e 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued e Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster
237. on the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pres sure value ee STARTING AND OPERATING 275 CAUTION NOTE The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warnings have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system op eration or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maint
238. on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 393 WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 306 INDEX In Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 349 Adding Fuel s
239. one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 If the radio has BLUE amp ME refer to the appropriate BLUE amp ME User s Manual for further information Speed Display When this function is activated the cluster will display the vehicle speed MPH or km h To activate On or to deactivate Off the speed display feature proceed as follows 1 Briefly press the SET ESC button MPH km h then Off will flash on the display according to previous setting 2 Press the UP A or DOWN V button to select display deactivation Off MPH or km h 3 Briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the menu screen or press and hold the SET ESC button approxi mately one second to go back to the main screen Autoclose With this function active the doors will automatically lock at when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h To change the setting proceed as follows 1 Briefly press the SET ESC button On or Off will flash on the display according to the previous set ting 2 Press the UP Aor DOWN V button for setting 3 Briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the menu screen or press and hold the SET ESC button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Units Set Units This function may be used to set the measurement u
240. ons On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE HI The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the ON RUN or START position If the key is in the OFF LOCK position or not in the ignition the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment e Also the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning ry Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Air
241. ooooooooo ooo 127 To Accelerate For Passing 119 Sun Shade If Equipped 127 E REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED 120 M ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS 128 Rear Park Assist Sensors 120 M CIGAR LIGHTER IF EQUIPPED Rear Park Assist Alerts 121 M CUPHOLDERS 00 0 Failure Indications oe ecra cesarea eaa 122 M STORAGE colista vin tus 132 Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System 122 Glove Box Compartment 132 Park Assist System Usage Precautions 123 Passenger Seat Storage If Equipped 132 ll POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED 125 M CARGO AREA FEATURES i204 eas dee as E 133 To Open ue beret nies Beale Sa eS 126 W REAR WINDOW FEATURES secrosaresnass 134 TO Close ici dto aie thd uos 126 Rear Window Defroster ooo o 134 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x POWER CONVERTIBLE TOP IF EQUIPPED On vehicles equipped with a power convertible top the power convertible top switch is located on the overhead console The switch contains two buttons The passenger side button which is used to open the power top and the driver side button which is used to close the power top i y Power Convertible Top Switch NOTE The power top buttons will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ACC ON RUN position Lowering The Power Top
242. or the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized studio or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 331 you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is
243. ore than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result When the tread is worn to the tread wear indica tors the temporary use spare tire needs to be Tire Spinning replaced When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not Besure to follow the warnings which apply to your spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h or ram spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop failure and loss of vehicle control ping when you are stuck Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the Emergencies for further information wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time 268 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h for more than 30 seconds continu ously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators 055007576 Tread wear indic
244. ot relearn repeat the procedure a second time Wind Stop The Wind Stop installs in the backseat area of the vehicle The Wind Stop will not interfere with power top opera tion Therefore it can remain installed when the top is up a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror The mirror can be adjusted up down left and right for various drivers The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield A Adjusting Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In A light to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate CAUTION when the dimming feature is activated The sensor to the right of the button does not illuminate To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never NOTE This feature is disabled when the vehicle is SPray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror moving in reverse Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Power Mirrors The power mirro
245. outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear 9 Blower Control Down Button There are 12 blower speeds The blower speed decreases as you press this button Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN 10 Temperature Control Down Button Automatic Operation Provides temperature down control Push the button for 1 Press the AUTO button on the Automatic Temperature cooler temperature settings Control ATC Panel the indicator will illuminate 11 Climate Control ON OFF Button NER Press and release to turn the Climate Control ON or OFF 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the temperature con 12 Recirculation Control Button trol buttons Once the desired temperature is dis played the system will achieve and automatically Press and release to change the current setting The eed maintain that comfort level indicator illuminates when ON NOTE 3 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is f not necessary to change the settings You will experi When in Defrost mode the Recirculation button will ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing t
246. ove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder 020235839 Mechanical Key Release Button 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MH WARNING Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and push ignition button to place ignition in OFF position When leaving the vehicle always lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil 020236009 f me dren should be warned not to touch the parking Ignition Switch Positions brake brake pedal or the shift lever 1 STOP OFF LOCK 3 AVV START Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or 2 MAR ACC ON RUN in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON RUN position A child could operate power windows other con trols or move the vehicle Continued a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 WARNING Continued Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Locking Doors With A Key You can insert
247. pants to fasten their seat belts If a front seat belt is 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual notification The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized studio FIAT Group Automobiles does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s or front passenger if equipped with BeltAlert seat belt remains unfastened Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized studio can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the sea
248. peed Beep Trip B Data e Set Time 156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu Without Submenu 1 Briefly press the SET ESC button to select the main menu option to set Press the UP Aor DOWN WV button by single presses to select the new setting Briefly press the SET ESC button to store the new setting and go back to the main menu option previ ously selected Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With ubmenu 1 Briefly press the SET ESC button to display the first submenu option 2 Press the UP or DOWN V button by single presses to scroll through all the submenu options 3 Briefly press the SET ESC button to select the dis played submenu option and to open the relevant setup menu 4 Press the UP Aor DOWN V button by single presses to select the new setting for this submenu option 5 Briefly press the SET ESC button to store the new setting and go back to the previously selected sub menu option 6 Press and hold the SET ESC button to return to the main menu short hold or the main screen longer hold Change Engine Oil Indicator System Change Engine Oil Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Change Engine Oil message will es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157 flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval
249. permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire inflation pressure Pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures 256 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door 811ad0do Tire Placard Location Tire And Loading Information Placard SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX KG QR XXX LBS FRONT REAR SPARE ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE P195 70R14 P195 70R14 T125 70D15 COLD TIRE 29PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION CA 4N109268 TIRE 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard STARTING AND OPERATING 257 This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maxim
250. phones electronics and other low power devices Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty Power Outlet UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure 034662413 Power Outlet Fuse Location Underhood F15 Fuse 15 A Blue Cigar Lighter Front Console 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IN CAUTION CIGAR LIGHTER IF EQUIPPED e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw WARNING power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will deg
251. pped Toggles RBDS information in FM MENU Advanced functions adjustment Menu activation short button press Adjustment type selection press A or V Adjustment of values press lt q orp Vol Vol Volume adjustment Press button volume increase Press button volume decrease UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 BUTTON RADIO FUNCTIONS MODE 4 Radio Station Search Automatic search press buttons lt q or AV e Automatic Search long press for fast forward e Manual Search Manual search press buttons A or Y long press for fast forward 12345 Current radio station storing Long button press for memory preset 1 to 5 respectively Stored station recall Short button press for memory preset 1 to 5 respectively BUTTON CD FUNCTIONS MODE a CD ejection Short button press lt gt Previous next track play Short button press lt q or lt gt CD track fast forward rewind Long button press lt q orp AV Previous next folder play for CD MP3 Short button press A or V 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME General Information The radio offers the following functions Radio Section e e e e e e PLL tuning with FM AM MW frequency bands RBDS Radio Broadcast Data System Automatic manual station tuning FM Multipath detector Manual storing of 25 stations base radio and 40 stations if equipped with Satellite 15 on FM band 5 on FMA 5
252. productive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of FIAT Group Automobiles warranties applicable to this vehicle and market REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized stu dio and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 ITY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercargov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE 390 West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recal
253. quid dishwashing soap Do not use detergent CAUTION Never use an abrasive type cleaner or bleaches Cleaners should not contain silicones organic sol vents petroleum distillates or plasticizers Always wait until the top is thoroughly dry before lowering it into the storage area Scrub in all directions covering an area of about two square feet at a time Avoid heavy scrubbing Rinse the entire vehicle with water to remove all soap and dirt from the top fabric and to prevent streaking on painted and chrome surfaces Allow the top to dry before lowering Vacuuming the top with a wet dry shop vacuum will FA decrease the top s drying time ensure removal of all dirt and delete streaks in the material Multiple cleanings may be necessary to remove stubborn stains If stains persist contact your local authorized studio for further suggestions 366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN FUSES Vehicle Mini NT Interior Fuses Cavity Fuse F Description use The interior f l is part of the Body Control ae e interior fuse panel is part of the Body Contro i Module BCM and is located on the driver s side under 1 F12 ps Right Low Beam the instrument panel Mp Brown 2 F32 5 Amp Front and Rear Tan Ceiling Lights Trunk and Door Courtesy Lights 3 F53 5 Amp Instrument Panel Tan Node 4 F38 20 Amp Central Door Yellow Locking 5 F36 10 Amp Diagnostic Socket Red Car Radio Climate Control Sy
254. r forming this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes Refer to Automatic Operation for more information 2 A C Button Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning A C setting Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode 3 Temperature Control Up Button Provides temperature up control Push the button for warmer temperature settings ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 4 Blower Control Up Button There are 12 blower speeds The blower speed increases as you press this button Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode 5 Mix Mode Air is directed through the floor defrost and side win dow demister outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the wind shield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode 6 Front Defrost Press and release to change the current setting The indicator illuminates when ON The blower will auto matically default to medium high if the Defrost mode is selected Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode 7 Floor Mode Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demister outlets 8 Panel Mode Air is directed through the
255. r controls are located on the driver s door trim panel 030406002 Automatic Dimming Mirror Power Mirror Switches The power mirror controls consist of a mirror select switch and a four way mirror control switch To adjust a mirror press the mirror select switch to either the L left or R right to select the mirror you need to adjust UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 Using the mirror control switch press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Spotter Mirror If Equipped Folding Mirrors Some models are equipped with a driver s side spotter The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to mirror The spotter mirror allows for a greater range of pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage The visibility on the driver s side of the vehicle mirror has three detent positions full forward normal and full rearward Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear wi
256. r turns on while driving have the system inspected at an authorized studio as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 10 Cruise On Indicator If Equipped This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing Your Instrument Panel UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143 11 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN this light will turn on if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound When driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 12 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the 144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized studio If jump star
257. rade the bat tery even more quickly Only use these intermit tently and with great caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot To avoid serious injury handle the cigar lighter with care Always check that the cigar lighter has turned off UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 CUPHOLDERS For rear passengers there are cupholders located on the For the driver and front passenger cupholders are lo FIGOE DODWOSTHITIG tant inven al e setts cated on the floor console between the front seats 035135891 035135889 Rear Cupholders Front Cupholders 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE iS STORAGE Passenger Seat Storage If Equipped Glove Box Compartment Some models may be equipped with storage under the front passenger seat Pull outward on the latch to open The glove box is located on the right side of the instru kesong compartment ment panel Pull outward on the door latch to open the glove box Push the glove box door upward to close it ar a 035235947 Passenger Seat Storage Glove Box Compartment n UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 CARGO AREA FEATURES Th
258. raffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The Rear Park Assist system provides an audible indica tion of the distance between the rear fascia bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up e g during a parking maneuver Refer to the Park Assist System Usage Precautions for the limitations of this system and recommendations Rear Park Assist is automatically activated when the transmission is placed into REVERSE As the distance from an obstacle behind the vehicle decreases the au dible alert becomes more frequent Rear Park Assist Sensors The four Rear Park Assist sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles in the horizontal direction from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 55 in 140 cm from the center of the rear fascia bumper and up to 24 in 60 cm from the corners of the rear fascia bumper depending on the location type and orientation of the obstacle If several obstacles are detected the Rear Park Assist system indicates the nearest obstacle The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corresponds to the maximum height of an obstacle that would clear the underside of the car during the parking maneuver a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Rear Park Assist Alerts If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when REVERSE gear is engag
259. rd Edition Printed in U S A
260. re off to avoid draining the battery Interior Light Timing Center Position There are four different modes of operation that can be activated in this position NOTE The timer is deactivated when the key is moved into the ON RUN position e When one door is opened a 3 minute timer is activated When the key is removed from the ignition within two minutes of the ignition being turned off a 10 second timer is activated 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II Front Fog Lights If Equipped The fog light switch is located on the center stack of the instrument panel just below the radio Fog Light Switch Press the switch once to turn the front fog lights on Press the switch a second time to turn the front fog lights off WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The windshield wiper washer lever is located on the right side of the steering column NOTE The windshield wipers washers will only oper ate with the ignition in the ON RUN position a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Front Windshield Wiper Operation Windshield Wiper Off There are five different modes of operation for the front This is the normal position of the wiper lever windshield wipers The windshield wiper lever can be I i Wi Operation raised or lowered to access these modes ntermittent Wiper 2p Push the lever downward to the first detent The wipers will operate intermittently mmm NOTE The Intermittent func
261. re will be no horn chirp this is to indicate that a door is still ajar Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key Customer Key Programming If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized studio for details General Information This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak battery in RKE transmitter The expected life of the battery is from one to two years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios Transmitter Battery Replacement NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 1 Press the mechanical key release button and release the mechanical key to access the battery case screw located on the side of the Key Fob 020235
262. read wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle A STARTING AND OPERATING 235 Flowing Rising Water WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so CAUTION e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wav
263. result in false speedometer and odometer read ings i Continued NOTE Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire 272 STARTING AND OPERATING HN CAUTION Continued e Install chains on the front wheels as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 0 5 mile 0 8 km Do not drive for prolonged periods of time on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if dif ferent from the speed recommended by the vehicle manufacturer Always use the lower suggested operating speed if the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer suggest different maximum speeds This notice applies to all chain traction devices including link and cable radial chains TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance int
264. rized studio as soon as pos sible Refer to F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace ment NOTE When having the tire serviced advise the autho rized studio or service center that the tire has been sealed using the TIREFIT service kit recessed area under the sealant bottle Press the Sealant Bottle release button The Sealant Bottle 1 will pop up Remove the bottle and dispose of it accordingly Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT hous ing Position the new Sealant Bottle 1 in the housing so that the Sealant Hose 6 aligns with the hose slot in the front of the housing Press the bottle into the housing An audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked into place 302 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN 6 Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 and return the hose to its WARNING peores storage area located on the bottom of the air pump Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You 7 Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the could be crushed Never put any part of your body vehicle under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING IF EQUIPPED where it can be raised on a lift WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the e Never start or run the engine while t
265. rom the engine cooling system 292 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN CAUTION TIREFIT KIT Small punctures up to 14 6 mm in the tire tread can be sealed with TIREFIT Foreign objects e g screws or nails should not be removed from the tire TIREFIT can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately A F 20 C Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the pointer rises to the H red mark the instrument cluster will sound a chime When safe pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer This kit will provide a temporary tire seal allowing you remains on the H red mark for more than a minute to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles 160 km with a turn the engine off immediately and call for service maximum speed of 55 mph 88 km hr TIREFIT Storage WARNING The TIREFIT kit is located under the front driver s seat You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 293 TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation TIREFIT Kit Location TIREFIT Components 1 Sealant Bottle 2 Deflation Button
266. rs damage to the engine control system It also could 79 Engine Temperature Warning Light affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required _ This light warns of an overheated engine condi tion The engine coolant temperature indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold 148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for further information 20 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the Brake Warning Light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the brake system reservoir BRAKE The light will remain on until the cause is corrected If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles
267. rsation with Bluetooth phones supporting this option e Call Waiting while engaged in a phone conversa tion you can receive notification of another incoming phone call answer the other incoming phone call and switch between two ongoing phone conversations Call waiting is only supported by a subset of compat ible mobile phones Refusing Incoming Call Or Ending A Call you can refuse an incoming call or end a current call by pressing the Phone Hang up button on the steering wheel After pairing and connecting your phone with the BLUE amp ME system you can make phone calls by speaking keywords or pressing buttons on the steering wheel When using the hands free phone the audio output of a phone conversation is heard through your car sound speakers Message Reader The BLUE amp ME message reader enables automatic reading through the car sound system of the SMS texts you receive on your Bluetooth wireless technology mobile phone that are received when the phone is paired and connected to BLUE amp ME system It does not pro vide access to messages that were received before the device was connected with the BLUE amp ME system The message reader will also interpret any abbreviation and emoticon contained in the SMS text NOTE Not all mobile phones support the SMS text message reader function or automatic phonebook trans fer via Bluetooth Consult www fiatusa com for further information on the list
268. rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses MRXC4W4MA4 2546A C4W4MA4 Single United States Canada FUEL REQUIREMENTS Your vehicle is designed to meet all emis mm sion regulations and provide satisfactory 87 fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded gasoline having 800dfabb an octane range of 87 to 91 The manufac turer recommends the use of 91 octane or higher for optimum performance RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline with the appropriate octane rating for your engine before consid ering service for the vehicle STARTING AND OPERATING 279 FUEL REQUIREMENTS 1 4L Turbo This engine is designed to meet all emis sion regulations and provide satisfactory 01 fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded regular gaso goodfabs line having an octane
269. s Average consumption B e Distance less than 30 miles or 50 km mm Average speed B The vehicle is parked for a long time with the engine Travel time B driving time running NOTE Trip B functions may be excluded see Trip B NOTE The range depends on several factors driving Data Range and Instantaneous consumption can style type of route freeway residential mountain roads not be reset etc conditions of use of the car load tire pressure etc Trip planning must take into account the above notes Distance Travelled This value shows the distance covered since the last reset 160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Average Consumption This value shows the approximate average consumption since the last reset Instant Consumption This indicates the fuel consumption The value is con stantly updated The message will appear on the display if the car is parked with the engine running Average Speed This value shows the vehicle s average speed as a func tion of the overall time elapsed since the last reset Travel Time This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Dimmer The EVIC display is provided with a light sensor capable of detecting environmental light conditions and adjust ing the brightness of the instruments accordingly NOTE The brightness of the instrument panel may change while travelling fol
270. s customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle The enclosed Warranty Information lists the services that FIAT Group Automobiles offers to its customers e the Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for maintaining its validity e the range of additional services available to FIAT Group Automobiles customers NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized studio knows your vehicle best has factory trained techni cians and genuine parts and cares about your satisfaction a INTRODUCTION 5 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual 6 INTRODUCTION kDa a OS Daron EIEII ea POT AA OA o Oralet o E Ram ESP BAS ECTRONIC STABILITY
271. s that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If all the segments of the temperature gauge are lit pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151 WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized studio for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Maintaining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 26 Odometer Trip Odometer Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Area This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has been driven U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair techni
272. s switched off If the volume level is equal to or lower than the minimum value the radio will come on at the minimum volume e On volume limit off The radio will come on at the same volume as before it was switched off The volume level can be between 0 and 40 Use the buttons or amp to change the setting NOTE Using the Menu it is only possible to adjust the activation deactivation of the function and not the minimum or maximum volume value e If the battery charge is too low the volume cannot be adjusted between the minimum and the maximum level 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Radio Off Function This function makes it possible to set the radio switching off mode by choosing between two methods The chosen mode appears on the display e Radio off 00 min The radio turns off in connec tion with the ignition key the radio is turned auto matically off as soon as the key is turned to the STOP position e Radio off 20 min The radio turns off indepen dently from the ignition key the radio remains on for a maximum period of 20 minutes after the key has been turned to the STOP position System Reset Function This function is used to restore all settings to the factory values The options are e NO No restore intervention e YES The default parameters will be restored Dur ing such operation the wording Resetting appears on the display At the end of t
273. seat covers or portable DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death Rear Head Restraints To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for information on tether routing 030936590 Push Button 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2 Rotate the safety catch under the front edge of the To open the hood two latches must be released Wood een ani nae fie Bpad 1 Pull the bottom of the RED hood release lever located on the left kick panel rearward 031335904 Hood Safety Latch Location Lift the hood prop rod that clips to the right side left side when standing in front of the hood of the engine Hood Release Lever compartment Place the hood prop rod in the hole of hood hinge to secure the hood in the open position a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 In hot climates the prop rod may be hot Pick up the prop LIGHTS rod at the foam on the end of the prop rod Multifunction Lever WARNING The multifunction lever located on the left side of the o steering wheel controls the operation of the headlights
274. sengers Pull forward on the Pump the lever upward to raise the seat height or pump release lever located on the outboard side of the seatback the lever downward to lower the seat height dump the seatback forward then slide the seat forward to allow access in and out of the rear seat 030935939 Height Adjuster EZ Entry Lever 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM Lift the seatback upright and push the seat rearward to its locked position once the rear passengers are seated Memory Feature The driver seat also has a memory feature which can operate in two ways Memory Function Option 1 Full Seat Back And Track Fore Aft Position Memory After using the EZ entry function the seatback angle and the Track fore aft adjuster can both re lock into the position they were most recently adjusted to This is accomplished if the seat is moved fully rearward to its last fore aft position on the tracks before the seat back is returned upright Memory Function Option 2 Seat Back Only Memory After using the EZ entry function the seat back may first be returned upright prior to going back to the last fore aft memory position on the tracks This results in the seat back memory being set only The track will then be locked forward of its last set fore aft memory posi tion To then reset the fore aft track memory feature to reestablish memory function option 1 the seat has to be returned fully rearw
275. stem Fuse Panel a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 Vehicle Mini Vehicle Mini Cavity Fuse Description Cavity Fuse Description Fuse Fuse Number Number 6 F43 20 Amp Bi Directional 11 F37 5 Amp Stop Light Switch Yellow Washer Tan Instrument Panel 7 F48 20 Amp Passenger Power Node Yellow Window 12 F49 5 Amp Exterior Mirror 8 F13 75 Left Low Beam Tan GPS Electric Amp Headlamp Leveling Mirror Parking Brown Sensor 9 F50 75 Airbag 13 F31 5 Amp Ignition Climate Amp Tan Control Brown 14 F47 20 Amp Driver Power 10 F51 5 Amp Car Radio Switch Yellow Window Tan Climate Control System Stop Light Clutch 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Underhood Fuses The ID number of the electrical component correspond The Front Distribution Unit is located on the right side of ine Woah suse cabe OUR onthe back of thie cover the engine compartment next to the battery To access the Maxi fuses press the release tabs and remove the cover Cavity Fuse Mini Fuse Description F01 60 Amp Body Controller Blue F02 20 Amp Audio Amplifier Yellow F03 20 Amp Ignition Switch Yellow F04 40 Amp Anti Lock Brake Orange Pump F05 70 Amp Electric Power Pd 072710794 Tan Steering Front Distribution Unit F06 20 Amp Radiator Fan Yellow Single Speed Aa MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 Cavi
276. sure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold tire pressure on the placard Once the low tire pressure warning Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light illuminates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours tire pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 159 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be on In this situati
277. t located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation 250 STARTING AND OPERATING Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during accel TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION eration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE e The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON Tire Markings Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously ESC The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the Electronic Stability Control ESC is off 054903773 OFF 1 U S DOT Safety Standards 4 Maximum Load Code TIN 5 Maximum Pressure 2 Size Designation 6 Treadwear Traction and 3 Service Description Temperature Grades A STARTING AND OPERATING 251 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H e European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
278. t be selected The specifications and operating conditions for playing MP3 files are the following e The CD ROMs used should be burned in accordance with ISO standard 9660 The music files should have the extension mp3 or wma files with a different extension will not be reproduced The sampling frequencies that can be reproduced are 44 1 kHz stereo from 96 to 320 kbit s 22 05 kHz mono or stereo from 32 to 80 kbit s Tracks with a variable bit rate can be reproduced NOTE The track names must not include the following characters spaces apostrophes and open and close brackets During the burning of a MP3 CD make sure that the names of the files do not contain these characters if not the radio will not be able to play the tracks involved Selecting MP3 Sessions With Hybrid Discs If a hybrid disc is inserted Mixed Mode Enhanced CD Extra also containing MP3 files the radio automati cally starts playing the audio session It is possible to move to the MP3 session while playing by keeping the CD button pressed for more than 2 seconds A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 NOTE When the function is activated the radio may take a few seconds to start playing While checking the disc the display will show CD Reading If no MP3 files are detected the radio will resume playing the audio session from the point where it was interrupted Display Information ID3 Tag Information Displa
279. t belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating posi tions Remove and store the extender when not needed Continued a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers In addition the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column 022640267 Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags 2 Knee Bolster 3 Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
280. t equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ibs 295 kg A STARTING AND OPERATING 259 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo NOTE Deus loaded OncHie velueley That weiss may not The following table shows examples on how to calcu safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 892 kg 260 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Occupant 1 200 lbs Weight Occupant 2 130 lbs Occupant 3 160 Ibs E 865 Ibs 195 lbs Occupant 1 210 ibs Occupant 2 180 lbs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540
281. t is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage Drain flush and refill as soon as possible to avoid damage if coolant types are mixed in an emergency Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351 WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pres sure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure e Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To
282. t the system is nearly equally performing with different persons i e the voice recognition system is of the speaker independent type With this system you can also play your favorite music stored on USB device and select tracks and playback modes with both voice commands or buttons on the steering wheel This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules subject to the following two conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept all interference received including interference that may cause undesired oper ation The Hands Free Kit The basic characteristic of this hands free kit is voice recognition with Bluetooth wireless technology With this system you can make and receive calls safely and securely by using either voice commands or buttons on the steering wheel This can be done under any driving condition without ever having to take your eyes off the road or remove your hands from the steering wheel as required by current laws Bluetooth wireless technology enables wireless connec tion between your mobile phone and the hands free kit installed on your car To use the hands free kit you need a Bluetooth wireless technology enabled mobile phone This hands free kit gives you the possibility of interacting vocally with your mobile phone while driving even if your mobile device does not feature this capability You can also interact with UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR V
283. table battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur 314 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Preparations For Jump Start The battery in your vehicle is located between the left front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash shield To allow jump starting there are remote battery posts located on the left side of the engine compartment 060835932 Battery Posts 1 Positive Post Covered With Protective Cap 2 Negative Post a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 315 WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON You can be injured by moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories 3 Remove the protective cover over the remote positive battery post To remove the cover press the locking tab and pull upward on the cover 4
284. tari 334 Oil Selection e RR wea Que es 334 Oil SynthetiC isse sedie Hea RR etta 335 Overheating llle 291 Olar hg xod seed peg emet E quee s 217 Temperature Ga ge sses nesi esses 150 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 47 400 INDEX IN Event Data Recorder oo o oo oo o 53 Exhaust Gas Caution 0 0 0 000 eee eae 24 Exhaust Systems isa sci ha este ed aa Rees 76 Exterior LACKS cb pi ERES 80 Filler Location Fuel 152 Filters Aur Cleaner s nde a x REX EY Y 336 Air Conditioning 0 0 ooo 339 Engine Fuel 4 5 osse eph Had 377 EngineOIl niche es wee ere dia RBS dE 336 Engine Oil Disposal oooooooooo 335 Flashers Tum Signal 5 ovas er d aep vn 80 Flooded Engine Starting ooooooooo o 219 Fluid Brake oi gnu 6c RR RR Rex 378 Fluid Capacities ics ies xx Ren UR Kae ae 376 Fud Leaks 2t wc x VERIOR r tc ERU h 80 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 357 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 377 Fog Lights oes recep eR ewe us 112 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle i4 vie E 9 des 317 A E DEE EA 279 Adding seie ote ee ad da e RE es 283 Additives 3 22i ies d t REY 282 Capacity x ius deed DUE ord bte end 376 Clean Ait uus seg oso eng ae aaa e dos 280 Cutoff escri a enc E qos ETUR E b nue 47 Filler Cap Gas Cap crcsriirssreer uses 152 Filler Door Gas Cap 00000000 152 Gasoline
285. te API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade SAE 5W 30 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy Your engine oil filler cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity grade for your engine Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 335 engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Engine Oil Viscosity 1 4L Turbo SAE Grade SAE 5W 40 full synthetic engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil
286. te Radio With over 130 channels SiriusXM M Satellite Radio brings you more of what you love Get 69 channels of 10076 commercial free music plus all of your favorite sports news talk and entertainment Hear every NFL game every NASCAR race college sports and more The biggest and most compelling names in talk with Howard Stern and Martha Stewart laugh out loud comedy with Jamie Foxx s The Foxxhole and Blue Collar Comedy plus kids programming world class news local traffic and weather All of this with crystal clear coast to coast coverage Everything worth listening to is now on SiriusXM A one year SiriusXM Satellite Radio sub scription is included SirtusXM and all related marks a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc and its subsidiaries SiriusXM Radio requires a subscrip tion sold separately after trial subscription included with vehicle purchase Prices and programming are provided by SiriusXM and are subject to change Subscriptions governed by Terms amp Conditions available at sirius com service terms SiriusXM M Radio U S service only avail able to those at least 18 years of age in the 48 contiguous United States D C and PR Service available in Canada see www siriuscanada ca SiriusXM Satellite Radio Program Types Program Types can be selected by pressing the A or V buttons The Program Type will change to the next category and the rad
287. tely one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings Lock When Unlock Driver Door is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Unlock Drivers Door is selected you must press the RKE trans mitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger door When All Doors is selected both of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until Unlock Driver Door or All Doors appears Exit Menu This function closes the initial menu screen Briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the main screen Press the ZA button to return to the first menu option Speed Beep Press the Y button to return to the last menu option Daylights UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 SALES CODE RAB RADIO If the radio has BLUE amp ME refer to the appropriate BLUE amp ME User s Manual for further information The instructions for use are given below and we recom mend you to read them carefully Suggestions Road Safety B d Please learn how to use all different radio functions e g R A MO m ae ca a e i ms store stations before beginning to drive _ S Reception Conditions 041135858 Reception conditions change constantly while driving Introduction Reception may be interfered with by t
288. the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 onto the valve stem Uncoil the Power Plug 8 and insert the plug into the vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet NOTE Do not remove foreign objects e g screws or nails from the tire C Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into The Deflated Tire e Always start the engine before turning ON the TIRE FIT kit NOTE Manual transmission vehicles must have the parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL e After pressing the Power Button 4 the sealant white fluid will flow from the Sealant Bottle 1 through the Sealant Hose 6 and into the tire NOTE Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire If the sealant white fluid does not flow within 0 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose 6 1 Press the Power Button 4 to turn Off the TIREFIT kit Disconnect the Sealant Hose 6 from the valve stem Make sure the valve stem is free of debris Reconnect 298 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN the Sealant Hose 6 to the valve stem Check that the Mode Select Knob 5 is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode Press the Power Button 4 to turn On the TIREFIT kit 2 Connect the Power Plug 8 to a different 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle if 2 available Make sure the engine is running before turning ON the TIREFIT Kit 3 The Sealant Bottle 1 may be empty due to previous use
289. the interior surface of the an az This indicator will illuminate when the park window zbQ lights or headlights are turned on If the Follow Keep all objects a safe distance from the window Me Home feature is activated this indicator will illuminate and the EVIC will show how 3 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped long the function remains active For further information refer to Follow Me Home in Understanding The FO This indicator will illuminate when the front fog Features of Your Vehicle lights are on 4 Low Fuel Light 7 Turn Signal Indicators When the fuel level reaches approximately 1 0 gal lon 3 8L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added The arrows will flash in unison with the exte Qr rior turn signal when using the turn signal lever 5 High Beam Indicator 8 Generic Warning Light _ This light indicates that the headlights are on high The Generic Warning Light will illuminate if beam Pull the turn signal lever toward the steer any of the following conditions occur Oil ing wheel to switch the headlights to low beam Change Request Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Failure External Light Failure Fuel Cut Off Intervention Fuel Cut Off Not Available Parking Sensor Failure 9 Air Bag Warning Light o This light will turn on for four seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on o
290. the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine 318 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN CAUTION CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to When rocking a stuck vehicle by shifting be transmission overheating and failure Allow the en tween DRIVE 2nd gear and REVERSE do not spin gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drive train damage may result e Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no trans NOTE Press the ESC Off switch to place the Electronic mission shifting occurring Stability Control ESC system in Partial Off mode before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Brake Control in Starting And Operating for further infor mation Once the vehicle has been freed press the ESC Off switch again to restore ESC On mode least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 319 WARNING 3 Remove the shift lever override access cover located on the right side of the shift lever housing by prying Fast spinning tires can be dangerous
291. the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING The Brake Assist System BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevail ing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning e The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others A STARTING AND OPERATING 245 Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one
292. the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates This especially applies to children Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC depending on several factors including the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain air bag The inflating side curtain air bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The air bag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain air bag is about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it
293. the wheel then install the wheel bolts has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may E 6 Install the spare wheel and wheel bolts with the cone result in personal injury shaped end of the bolts toward the wheel Lightly tighten the bolts To avoid the risk of forcing the CAUTION vehicle off the jack do not tighten the bolts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward The vehicle could be damaged if the 7 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left spare tire is mounted incorrectly 8 Finish tightening the bolts Push down on the wrench while tightening the wheel bolts Alternate bolts until each bolt has been tightened twice The correct wheel bolt torque is 63 ft Ibs 85 N m for steel wheels and 75 ft Ibs 100 N m for aluminum wheels If you doubt that you have tightened the bolts correctly have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized studio or service station WARNING To avoid possible personal injury handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges 312 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN 9 Disassemble the jack and tools and place them in the bag Stow it under the driver s seat and secure the bag WARNING to the floor with the straps attached to the floor of the A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard vehicle stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle Have WARNI
294. ting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies 13 Power Steering System Warning This light is used to manage the electrical e warning of the EPS Power Steering System Refer to Power Steering in Starting and Operating for further information 14 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the X Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the NEUTRAL position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an authorized studio for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running imme diate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an autho rized studio 15 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light I Each tire including the spare if provided 1 should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflat
295. tinuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle Select the outside air position for maximum defogging Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost The A C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection 4 Mode Control Rotate this control to change the system between Modes Panel Bi Level Floor Mix Defrost e Panel J Air is directed through the outlets in the instru ment panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear e Bi Level 2 Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets Floor 2 Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demister outlets o Mix w Air is directed through the floor defrost and side ugh window demister outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield e Defrost Hy Air is directed through the windshield and side window demister outle
296. tion only has one detent but wiper delay will vary with changes in vehicle speed As vehicle speed increases the delay time will decrease Low Speed Push the lever downward to the second detent The wipers will operate at low speed High Speed Push the lever downward to the third detent The wipers Windshield Wiper Operation will operate at high speed 031570041 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In Manual High Speed Mist CAUTION Push the lever upward from the off position The wipers will operate at high speed to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle This operation will continue until the lever is released When the lever is released the wipers will return to the off position and automatically e Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off shut off In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the Park posi Front Windshield Washer Operation tion before turning off the engine If the wiper Pull the windshield wiper washer lever toward the switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the steering wheel to activate the washers The wipers will windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is when the vehicle is restarted released Always remove any buildup of snow th
297. tive when installed in the customer s vehicle To reac tivate your service either call the number listed on the display or visit the provider online CAUTION Neither SIRIUS nor FIAT is responsible for any errors in accuracies in the SIRIUS data services or its use in vehicles SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc and its subsidiaries SiriusXMTM Radio requires a subscription sold separately after trial subscription included with vehicle purchase Prices and programming are provided by SiriusXM and are subject to change Subscriptions governed by Terms amp Conditions available at sirius com service terms SiriusXM Radio US service only available to those at least 18 years of age in the 48 contiguous United States D C amp PR Visit www sirius com Sirius Subscription Issues When Replacing A Sirius Radio When a radio needs to be replaced the studio will need the SIRIUS information to order a new radio even if the SIRIUS subscription has lapsed The ESN number con tains 12 digits a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 The following are instructions for retrieving the Elec tronic Serial Number ESN from FIAT 500 NAFTA model radios To retrieve the ESN of SIRIUS Satellite Receiver Module tune to Channel 0 Make sure that when the order is placed the ESN are correct If any of the ESN numbers are not entered correctly then the SIRIUS subscription will not be
298. to keep the Rear Park Assist system operating properly Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of Rear Park Assist Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The Rear Park Assist system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia bumper Objects such as bicycle carriers etc must not be placed within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper while driving the vehicle Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem causing a failure indication to be displayed in the instrument cluster 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In CAUTION WARNING Rear Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is Drivers must be careful when backing up even unable to recognize every obstacle including small when using the Rear Park Assist system Always obstacles Parking curbs might be temporarily de check carefully behind your vehicle look behind tected or not detected at all Obstacles located you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals above or below the sensors will not be detected other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible
299. ton on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi tion If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which are used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Re straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt
300. ts Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix or Defrost even if the Air Conditioning A C button is not pressed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary 5 A C Button Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is engaged UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 MAX A C For maximum cooling use the A C and recirculation modes at the same time ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A C compressor Then move the temperature control to the desired temperature Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped e The Automatic Temperature Control ATC allows the driver to select individual comfort settings e The system provides set and forget operation for optimum comfort and convenience e The system can be controlled manually if desired 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The AIC system automatically maintains the interior comfort level desired by the driver and passenger 045635854 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 1 AUTO Temperature Control ATC Button Controls airflow temperature distribution and air recir culation automatically Press and release to select Pe
301. ts you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit Next pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path 4 click Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap Refer to Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil dren LATCH Restraint System for directions to attach a tether anchor Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the belt path opening of the child restraint you may have trouble tightening the seat belt If this happens discon nect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt up to three full turns to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out away fro
302. tside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the s
303. tton Once activated a SPORT message will be displayed in the instrument cluster 2 Momentarily release the accelerator pedal 3 Press the accelerator pedal again to activate STARTING AND OPERATING 241 Automatic Transmission If Equipped The Sport mode increases steering feedback to the driver with slight increase in effort and changes the transmis sion shift schedules for more aggressive shifting This driving mode is useful while driving on twisty roads where more steering precision is desired in spirited comering 1 To activate the Sport mode press the SPORT button SPORT Button Once activated a SPORT message will be displayed in the instrument cluster 2 Press the SPORT button again to return to the standard driving mode 242 STARTING AND OPERATING HN BRAKE SYSTEM In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function The effort required to brake the vehicle will be significantly more than that required with the power system operating If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal capability the remaining system will still function with some loss of braking effectiveness This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application greater pedal force required to slow or stop and activation of the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light during brake use Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake
304. ty pad Mini Fuse Description Cavity a Mini Fuse Description F06 30 Amp Radiator Fan F14 5 Amp High beam Green Low Speed Tan Shutter F07 40 Amp Radiator Fan F15 15 Amp Cigar Lighter Orange High Speed Blue F08 30 Amp Blower Motor F16 7 5 Amp Transmission Green Brown F09 10 Amp Powertrain F17 25 Amp Powertrain Multi Red White air If Equipped F10 10 Amp Horn F17 15 Amp Powertrain Red Blue F11 15 Amp Powertrain F18 15 Amp Powertrain Blue Blue F11 10 Amp Powertrain Multi F18 5 Amp Powertrain Multi Red air If Equipped Tan air If Equipped 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Cavity i Mini Fuse Description Cavity is Mini Fuse Description F19 7 5 Amp Air Conditioning F84 10 Amp Transmission Brown Red F20 15 Amp Heated Seats F85 15 Amp Rear Defroster Blue If Equipped Blue Heated Mirrors F21 15 Amp Fuel Pump F87 5 Amp Lights Blue Tan F23 20 Amp Anti Lock Brake F90 5 Amp Heated Mirrors Yellow Valves Tan Es i od ied Control VEHICLE STORAGE F30 15 Amp Fog Lamps If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than Blue 21 days you may want to take these steps to protect your F82 30 Amp Sunroof battery Green Convertible Top Disconnect the negative cable from the battery a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at i
305. um load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual 258 STARTING AND OPERATING HN NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWKRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX Ibs or XXX kg The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amoun
306. unction is off the audio settings can only be changed by adjusting the Bass and Treble settings whereas when the function is on the acoustic curves can be adjusted To deactivate the equalizer select the EQ Preset function in the audio menu To activate the equalizer use the AUDIO button or to select one of the adjustments e EQ User adjustment of 7 equalizer bands that can be changed by the user e Classic equalizer preset for optimal classic music sound e Rock equalizer preset for optimal rock and pop music sound e Jazz equalizer preset for optimal jazz music sound When one of the equalizer adjustments is activated the wording EQ lights up User EQ Settings Function If Equipped To set a personalized equalizer adjustment Press AUDIO button Use the A or V buttons to set EQ function m Use or buttons to select EQ User Press MENU button to start adjusting equalizer On the display a 7 bar graph will appears in which each bar represents a frequency Select the bar to be adjusted by using the 4 or gt gt buttons The selected bar will start to flash and it can be adjusted using A or V buttons To store the setting press the MENU or AUDIO buttons 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL IE Menu MENU Button Functions Press the MENU button briefly to activate the Menu function Use the A or V buttons to scroll through the me
307. urns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 18 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL C an onboard diagnostic system called OBDII that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF LOCK to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147 Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after WARNING engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In above can reach higher temperatures than in normal most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will operating conditions This can cause a fire if you not require towing drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result CAUTION in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause othe
308. utton briefly to change the Audio functions After the AUDIO button is first pressed the display will show the Bass level value for the source activated at that time e g in FM mode the display will show the wording FM Bass 2 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 Use the buttons A or V to scroll through the Menu functions To change the setting of the selected function use the or buttons The current status of the selected function appears on the display The functions managed by the Audio Menu are e e e e e e e BASS Bass adjustment TREBLE Treble adjustment BALANCE right left Balance adjustment FADER front rear Balance adjustment LOUDNESS Loudness function activation deactivation EQUALIZER if equipped activation and selection of factory equalization adjustments USER EQUALIZER if equipped customized equal ization adjustment Tone Adjustment Proceed as follows 1 Press AUDIO button 2 Press the A or V button to select Bass or Treble in the AUDIO menu 3 Press the 4 or button or to increase decrease the bass or treble adjustments By pressing the 4 or amp buttons briefly the levels will change progressively By pressing them down longer the levels will change quickly Balance Adjustment Proceed as follows 1 Press AUDIO button 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE 2 Press the Aor V button to set Balance
309. very scratched flawed distorted etc Using discs like these will result in malfunctions or damage to the player A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 e The use of original CD media is required for the best e The CD player is capable of reading most compression quality audio production Correct operation is not systems currently in use following the development of guaranteed when CD R RW media are used that were these systems the reading of all compression formats not correctly burned and or with a maximum capacity is not guaranteed shove HM Technical Specifications e Do not use commercially available protective sheets for CDs or discs with stabilizers etc as they could get m stuck in the internal mechanism and damage the disc Two 165 mm diameter midwoofer speakers one speaker in each of the front doors The complete system consists of e If a copy protected CD is used it may take a few seconds before the system starts to play it The CD Two 22 mm diameter tweeter speakers one speaker in player cannot be guaranteed to play all protected each of the front pillars discs The fact that the CD is protected from being copied is often shown in very small letters or is difficult to read on the actual CD cover where it may be for example COPY CONTROL COPY PRO Antenna on the car roof MIS THIS CD CANNOT BE PLAYED ON A Radio with CD MP3 player Two 100 mm diameter full range speakers one speaker in
310. viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added To Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi tives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized studio service 336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type dispos able oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR eng
311. ward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direc tion are for children who are over two years old or who 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II have outgrown the rear facing weight or height limit of WARNING their rear facing convertible child seat Children should remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for e Improper installation can lead to failure of an as long as possible up to the highest weight or height infant or child restraint It could come loose in a allowed by the child seat collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or All children whose weight or height is above the forward facing limit for the child seat should use a belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle s seat belts fit properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt child restraint When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor ages or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave itloose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury a THINGS TO KNOW BEF
312. white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 a STARTING AND OPERATING 255 Tire Terminology And Definitions Term Definition B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or kPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum
313. will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 249 NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the switch Once the situation requir ing ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion WARNING When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESC has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESC function normally When in Partial Off mode the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator ESC Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the MAR ACC ON RUN position for four seconds If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized studio as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Ligh
314. work with the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag and the passenger side knee bolster to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensor s signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags Supplemen tal Driver Side Knee Air Bag Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on several factors including the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on several factors including the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear or side collisions The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisi
315. ws down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Emergency Operation In case of electrical failure the sunroof can be operated with the hex wrench that is located in the glove box There is a plug located in the rear of the sunroof opening at the center of the vehicle Removing the plug reveals a hex opening in the motor assembly of the sunroof Insert the hex wrench and turn moving the sunroof to the desired location Sun Shade If Equipped For vehicles equipped with either a power sunroof or a fixed glass roof there is a sun shade that can be open or closed To open the sun shade press the tab and move the shade to a full open position Manual Sun Shade 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IE ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS Power is available when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN or START position Insert the cigar lighter or accessory plug into the outlet for use To preserve the heating element do not hold the lighter in the heating position CAUTION There is a standard 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlet located in the floor console for added convenience This power outlet can power mobile
316. y In addition to the information relating to the time elapsed folder name and file name the radio is also capable of displaying ID3 TAG information relating to Title Track Artist and Author When one of the ID3 TAG pieces of information is chosen to be displayed Title Artist Album and this informa tion has not been recorded for the track played the text UNKNOWN will be displayed for that field Selection Of Next Previous Folder Press the A button to select a next folder or the V but ton to select the previous folder The display will show the number of the folder The folders are selected cyclically The first folder is selected after the last folder and vice versa If no other folder track is selected in the next 2 seconds the first track on the new folder will be played At that moment selected the last track in the folder is playing the next folder will be played Structure Of The Folders The radio with MP3 player Recognizes only the folders that effectively contain MP3 format files 19 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE e If the MP3 files on a CD ROM are structured in sub folders their structure is compressed to a single level structure where the sub folders are taken to the level of the main folders Troubleshooting General Sound Volume Low The Fader function should be adjusted to the values F front only to prevent the reduction in radio output power and the cancelling of the volum
317. y illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly 146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 16 Automatic Gearbox Failure ES This light will illuminate when there is an automatic transmission fault 17 Oil Pressure Warning Light TH this light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light t
318. y loading condi tions in hilly terrain or traveling into strong head winds use the AutoStick shift control described be low to select a lower gear Under these conditions using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup If the transmission operating temperature exceeds nor mal operating limits the transmission controller will A STARTING AND OPERATING 231 expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating During cold temperatures transmission operation may be modified depending on engine coolant temperature Normal operation will resume once the engine tempera ture has risen to a suitable level Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission remains in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to oper ate The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illu minated Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized studio for service without dam aging the transmission In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps Stop the vehicl
319. ystem Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized O 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II studio If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized studio Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized studio for service if your defroster is inoper able Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury e Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners e Never pl

2013 Fiat 500 Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents